JP2020065565A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of changing the advantageous degree of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can control a state to a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (e.g., 1 to 4), outputs an external output signal (security signal) in a setting change state (setting change mode), stops the output of the external output signal (security signal) after a lapse of a predetermined period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) from the end of the setting change state (setting change mode), and in a game state (non-recoverable error), continues the output of the external output signal until power supply to the game machine is stopped.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In the conventional gaming machines, gaming machines that can give a gaming privilege (prize ball, award medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game are general.

  Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of the gaming machine performance on a display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-16898, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem in that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the game advantage cannot be changed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the advantage of a game.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention is a gaming machine comprising: game control means for controlling the progress of a game; and effect control means for effecting control of a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means. The game control means controls setting change means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, and a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. The game stop means and the external output means for outputting an external output signal to the outside of the gaming machine, the external output means outputs the external output signal in the setting change state, the setting change state is The output of the external output signal is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period from the end, and in the game stopped state, the output of the external output signal is continued until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. , Characterized in that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to change the advantage of a game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the lower part of a glass frame. It is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view which shows the positional relationship of various elements which comprise a main controller. It is a figure showing an example of a block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main control part. It is a figure which shows the dump list of the memory area in a main control part. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game area and information area in a main control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving game states. It is a figure which shows an example of a prior determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special winning opening opening mode determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a game state setting table. It is a figure showing an example of various storage areas of a game work area. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting change process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the initialization timing of a main RAM, and the relationship of an initialization area. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board. It is a figure showing special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game process in the main control board. It is a diagram showing a jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the abnormality determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game ball counting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance information calculation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game area. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of an information display device. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of an information display device. It is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of an information display device. It is a figure which shows the example 5 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of an information indicator. It is a figure which shows the example 7 of a display of an information display device. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection structure of a main CPU, a 1st game information display device, and an information display. It is a figure which shows the main processing of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main process of a payout control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interruption process of a payout control part. It is the figure which shows the main processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the deformation example of the main processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the timer interruption processing of the production control section. It is the figure which shows the command analysis processing of the production control section. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of a setting change. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of RWM clear. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of setting confirmation. It is a figure which shows the time chart at the time of an unrecoverable error occurrence. (A) is a figure showing a time chart when a prize is won in a starting mouth, and (b) is a figure showing a time chart when a special symbol is stopped. It is a figure which shows the main processing of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interruption process of an integrated control part, and the V blank interrupt process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the adjustment mode switching process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows a changeover switch and an adjustment mode selection table. It is a figure which shows the audio | voice management table stored in the audio | voice ROM. It is a figure which shows the volume adjustment process of an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example in case a volume adjustment is performed in a customer waiting state. It is a figure showing a concrete example in case volume adjustment is performed during change production. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) in case a setting is changed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the setting is changed. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when RWM clear is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the RWM clear is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (operation example) when the control state of the game is restored. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the control state of the game is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example (operation example) when setting confirmation is performed. It is a diagram showing a specific example (effect example) when the setting confirmation is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the initial operation | movement at the time of power supply ON accompanied with RWM clear. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the initial operation | movement when the power supply ON is performed without clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a winning probability.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Structure of game machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 2 is an example of a partial perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment.

  The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a in which game balls (game media) as a game value flow down is formed.

  The outer frame 2 is provided with a decorative plate 2b on the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is opened in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail or a stopper, etc.) to the island facility of the game store. ) Fixed through.

  The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

  The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a is visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

  Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, a sound output device 9 including a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and a payout device 95, which will be described later, are paid out based on the establishment of a grant condition. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as the game balls, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have not flowed into the upper plate 11 and flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later, and the game. A shooting operation device 13 that can be operated to shoot a ball is provided.

  The audio output device 9 is provided at two places on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with a space therebetween, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like to produce a sound (music, voice). It is like this. In addition, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and produce an effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction of the light of each lamp (LED) and the emission color. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality occurs in which the game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

  The upper plate 11 is such that the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a for game balls is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the firing operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

  In addition, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a select button device 18 (FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) that function as an input device for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. (See) are provided side by side.

  The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting an operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive motor 17b for changing the projecting state located above the button drive motor 17b, a button vibration motor 17c for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a vibrating state that vibrates in a predetermined manner, and A button light emitting LED 17d (light emitting unit) for changing the effect button 17 between the extinguished state and the light emitting state of emitting light in a predetermined mode is provided, and the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. .

  The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross key for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 6) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1.

  Further, a lending operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money is provided on the right side of the upper plate 11. When the lending button 20a of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) provided in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball, When the return button 20b of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from a ball lending machine (not shown).

  Between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) for receiving the game balls that do not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding them to the lower plate 12 is formed. Further, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 6) for detecting that the game balls are full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower plate 12 is full. While the game is being performed, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 95 described later is stopped.

  The firing operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 6) and a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 6) including a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When it is detected by the touch sensor 15a that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is actuated to send the game balls one by one.

  On the game board mounting frame 3, a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 6) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 6) for detecting opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

  The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an opening at the front in the approximate center of the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and can store the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 through the opening are provided behind the game machine 1. Face.

  The launching device 26 is a launching member for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 6) for driving the launching member, and a launching slope that is inclined upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board. A rail and a stopper for stopping the game ball at the launch position, which is the inclined lower end of the launch rail, are provided. When the game ball sent by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 6) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the action of the launching member.

  The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the key hole is formed is exposed on the front surface side of the glass frame 4. Then, when the exclusive key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame. The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

  A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing down game balls to the outside of the game area (collection section of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed at the most downstream portion of the game area 5a.

  A frame-shaped ornamental frame 40 that restricts the entry of the game balls into the interior, which is a so-called center case, is provided in the approximate center of the game region 5a. It is divided into a left side game area in which the played game balls flow down, and a right side game area in which the game balls launched by a second launching force stronger than the first launching force flow down, and a left side playing region and a right side playing region. Communicate with each other below the decorative frame 40.

  On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left side game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the interior of the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage section 42 that rolls down the game ball introduced into the table and flows it down below the decorative frame 40.

  Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, there are provided three general winning openings 43 in which game balls can always win (balls), and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, there are games. One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 6) detects the gaming balls that have won (winning) the general winning opening 43 (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of gaming balls are generated. The payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) pays out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a game value).

  Below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) in which game balls can always win (ball entering) is provided, and the first starting opening 45 wins (wins). When the game ball played is detected by the first starting opening detection switch 45a (see FIG. 6) (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3) are paid out to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Are paid out to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a game value). In addition, a right to perform a special game determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a big hit game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored).

  Below the ornamental frame 40 and diagonally below the first starting opening 45, it is impossible to win a game ball (ball entry) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that is, winning in a hit determination described later). A variable starter 46 is provided that can convert a difficult closed state into a game ball winning state or an easy open state.

  The variable starting portion 46 becomes a flow path of the game ball by the upper surface inclining downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1), and is movable directly in the front-rear direction, and directly below the movable member 48. A second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) opening upward, and a second starting opening detecting switch 47a (FIG. 6) for detecting a game ball winning (entering) the second starting opening 47. And the movable member 48 is moved forward (the winning restriction position) to convert the second starting port 47 to the closed state, and the movable member 48 is moved backward (the winning allowable position). There is provided a second starting opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 6) for converting the second starting opening 47 to the open state.

  Then, a game ball is won in the second starting port 47 that is opened during the auxiliary game described later, and this game ball is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 6) (the giving condition is satisfied). Then, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as prize balls (giving a game value). In addition, a right to perform a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (here, a jackpot game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored).

  In the right game area on the right side of the decorative frame 40, a universal figure gate 44 (universal figure starting area) through which game balls can always pass is provided. When the game ball that has passed through the universal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize ball is given, but the right to make an auxiliary game determination (hit determination) as to whether or not to execute the auxiliary game is given. It is given (the universal figure determination information described later is stored).

  Downstream of the universal gate 44, it is possible or easy to open the game ball from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a big hit in the special game determination). A first variable winning portion 49 that can be converted into a state is provided.

  The first variable winning portion 49 becomes a flow path of the game ball by the upper surface inclining downward in the left-right direction (left side in the drawing), and also has a first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 movable in the front-rear direction, The first big winning opening 50 (winning area) which opens directly below the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51, and the first big winning detecting a game ball that has won (winning) the first big winning opening By moving the mouth detection switch 50a and the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (the winning restriction position), the first special winning opening 50 is converted to the closed state, and at the same time, the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51. A first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 6) for converting the first special winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the to the rear (winning allowance position) is provided.

  When the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 moves from the winning restriction position to the winning possible position during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 50 is converted into an open state, and the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 is opened. The game balls that have flowed down or the game balls that have reached the first big winning opening 50 win the first big winning opening 50. When the game balls that have won the first big winning opening 50 are detected by the first big winning opening detection switch 50a (the grant condition is satisfied), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are paid out. From the device 95 (see FIG. 3), the prize balls (giving a game value) are paid out to the upper plate 11.

  Downstream of the first variable winning portion 49, it is impossible or impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a big hit in a special game determination) or a difficult closed state. There is provided a second variable winning portion 52 that can be converted into an open state.

  The second variable winning portion 52 becomes a flow path of the game ball by the upper surface inclining downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure), and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 54 movable in the front-back direction, The second big winning opening 53 (winning area) that opens directly below the second big winning opening opening / closing member 54, and the second big winning that detects the game ball that has won (winning) the second big winning opening By moving the mouth detection switch 53a and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 54 toward the front (winning restriction position), the second special winning opening 53 is converted to the closed state, and at the same time, the second special winning opening opening / closing member 54. A second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b (see FIG. 6) for converting the second special winning opening 53 to an open state by moving the to the rear (winning allowance position) is provided.

  When the second big winning opening opening / closing member 54 moves from the winning restriction position to the winning allowable position during the big hit game, the second big winning opening 53 is converted into an open state, and the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 54 is opened. The game balls that have flowed down and the game balls that have reached the second special winning opening 53 win the second special winning opening 53. Then, when the game balls that have won the second special winning opening 53 are detected by the second special winning opening detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are provided to the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball.

  Then, the game ball shot to the left game area flows down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40 as it is, or flows into the warp device 41 and then flows down through the stage portion 42, and is provided below the decorative frame 40. One of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45 will be won, or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, the general winning opening 43, the universal figure gate 44, the first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning opening 50) and the second variable winning portion 52 (second big winning opening 53) provided in the right game area are won ( It does not pass).

  In addition, the game ball shot to the right-side game area is a general winning opening 43, a universal figure gate 44, a variable starting portion 46 (second starting opening 47), a first variable winning portion 49 (first big winning opening 50), Either the second variable winning part 52 (the second big winning opening 53) will be won, or it will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, there is no winning in the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left game area.

  On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball winning the first big winning opening 50 and a second big winning opening 53, and an out opening 39. An out ball flow path is provided for receiving an out ball consisting of an inflowing game ball and allowing it to flow down while being collected, and an out ball detection switch 57a (see FIG. 6) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out ball detection switch 57a flowing down the out ball flow path is discharged to the outside (island facility) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

  On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol hold display device 63, a second special symbol hold display device. There is provided a first game information display device 59 including 64, a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66, a right hitting display 67, and a state confirmation display 68.

In addition, a winning probability display sticker 200 is attached near the first game information display device 59. On the winning probability display sticker 200, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed. The details of the winning probability display sticker 200 will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.
The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and the sticking position is not limited to the vicinity of the first game information display device 59 and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

  The first special symbol display device 60 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the special game determination (the jackpot determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting opening 45. The variable display device, the second special symbol display device 61, the result of the special game determination (big jackpot determination of the second special symbol) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 (ball entry) (Notification) is a variable display, the normal symbol display 62, the result of the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (ball entry) of the game ball to the universal figure gate 44 It is a variable display for displaying (notifying).

  Special game determination and special game determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, reach determination) when the game ball wins (ball) in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47 It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game based on the acquired random number value, random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) and the obtained special figure determination information.

  Then, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the determination result is shown after a lapse of a predetermined time. (Notification) The stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Moreover, when the special game determination is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and the determination result is shown after a predetermined time has elapsed. (Notification) The stop display of the second special symbol is performed.

  The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each configured by a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices in the variable display of each special symbol blink at a predetermined interval or order. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (a big hit mode, a small hit mode, a lost mode) showing the result of the special game determination.

  In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the big hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which a special winning opening (first special winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, a predetermined number of times with an interval ( For example, it refers to a game state that is advantageous for a player who easily wins a prize ball when the player plays it twice or 16 times.

  In addition, the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening (the first winning opening 50, the second winning opening 53) in each round game are predetermined, but before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time. Even if a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (balls) in the special winning opening, one round game is finished. In the present embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage for the player.

  In addition, the "small hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute the small hit game (special game) in the special game determination. The “small hit game” means that the player who plays the game in which the big winning opening (the second big winning opening 53) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a more disadvantageous manner than the big winning game is easy to win the prize ball. A game state that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in the small hit game is set in advance, but even before the maximum opening time is reached, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won in the big winning opening (ball entry). ) Then the small hit game ends. Note that unlike the big hit game, the game state is not changed (due to) the execution of the small hit game.

  Auxiliary game determination is, based on the passage of the game ball to the public figure gate 44 (ball entry), general figure determination information (a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for general pattern variation pattern, etc.) It corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired universal figure determination information. In addition, when the auxiliary game determination is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed on the ordinary symbol display device 62, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the determination result is shown (notified) The stop display of the ordinary symbol is performed.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of the normal symbols, the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in an order. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or lost mode) showing the result of the auxiliary game determination.

  In the present embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" means a game state in which the second starting opening 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, but even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, the second starting port 47 is opened. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (ball), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is in a game state in which the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily established. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided.

  The first special symbol reservation display 63 is configured by a plurality of LEDs, the number of special symbol determination information (first special symbol reserved) stored when the game ball wins (ball) to the first starting opening 45 Is for displaying the number of first special figure reservations, and is lit or blinking in a mode showing the number of first special figure reservations. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first special figure reservations is stored up to four, but the number may be smaller or larger than four.

  The second special symbol reservation display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, the number of special figure determination information (second special figure reservation) stored when the game ball wins (ball entry) in the second starting opening 47 Is for displaying the number of second special figure reservations, and is lit or blinking in a mode showing the number of second special figure reservations. It should be noted that although the maximum number of the second special figure reservations is stored at four, it may be smaller or larger than four, or the second special figure reservation may not be stored. Good.

  The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the number of ordinary figure hold numbers which is the number of ordinary figure determination information (universal figure hold) stored when the game ball wins (passes) the ordinary figure gate 44. Is displayed, and is lit or blinks in a mode that indicates the number of universal figures reserved. It should be noted that the maximum four universal figure reservations are stored, but the number may be smaller or larger than four, or the general figure reservation may not be stored.

  The first special symbol display device 60 and / or the second special symbol display device 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the jackpot lottery for special symbols, "3" or "7" is displayed as a stop, and if it is lost, "-" is displayed as a stop. It is preferable to repeat turning off and "-".

  The number-of-rounds indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode that indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game is started. The lighting of the LED is started, the LED continues to be turned on during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of two times, only the fourth LED from the left is turned on, and if the number of rounds is a jackpot game of 16 times, all the LEDs are turned on.

  The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and in the jackpot state (special game state) and in the time saving game state, a right is urged to shoot a game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right-handed state). It is for displaying the hit display, and the LED lights up during the big hit state (special game state) and during the time saving game state.

  The state confirmation display 68 is configured by one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. The setting confirmation mode or the setting confirmation mode When shifting to, the LED starts to be turned on, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is set to.

  Note that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and the installation position is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is displayed so that which mode is set can be recognized. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be displayed blinking. However, when the setting change mode is set, the state confirmation display device 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the state is displayed. You may make it light-display only the confirmation indicator 68.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another indicator. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, since the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 described later are turned off, these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the first game information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. All the LEDs of the display device 69 may be turned on.

  On the lower left game board 5 inside the game area 5a, the first special symbol sub-display 69a, the second special symbol sub-display 69b, the normal symbol sub-display 69c, the first special symbol reservation sub A second game information display device 69 including a display 69d, a second special symbol holding sub-display 69e, a normal symbol holding sub-display 69f, and a right-handed sub-display 69g is provided.

  The second game information display device 69 is different from the first game information display device 59 provided outside the game area 5a in that a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and a second image display device 71 ( (Sub liquid crystal). In this way, the second game information display device 69 is provided nearer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) than the first game information display device 59. As a result, the position is conspicuous to the player, and it can be said that the second game information display device 69 is easier to recognize than the first game information display device 59.

  It should be noted that the installation position of the second game information display device 69 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be provided in the right side region of the game region 5a, for example.

  The first special symbol sub-display 69a displays (notifies) the result of the special game determination (big jackpot determination of the first special symbol) performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 (ball entry). Is a variable display, the second special symbol sub-display 69b, the result of the special game determination (big jackpot determination of the second special symbol) based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 47 (ball entry) Is a variable display for displaying (notifying), the normal symbol sub-display 69c, the auxiliary game determination (normal symbol hit determination) performed based on the passage (entering) of the game ball to the universal gate 44 (ball entry) It is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of.

  The first special symbol sub-display 69a, and the second special symbol sub-display 69b are each configured by one LED, the LED of the corresponding display in the variable display of each special symbol blinks at a predetermined interval. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on or off in a mode (a big-hit mode or a losing mode) showing the result of each big-hit lottery. The display of the first special symbol sub-display 69a, and the second special symbol sub-display 69b, the first effect symbol displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device 70 described later, the central area It may be referred to as a fourth symbol because it is the fourth effect symbol that follows the second effect symbol displayed in, the third effect symbol displayed in the right area.

  In addition, the timing of the fluctuation start and the timing of the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol sub-display 69a (second special symbol sub-display 69b) are the fluctuation start of the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

  Also, the first special symbol sub-display 69a (second special symbol sub-display 69b), when displaying the special symbol stopped, only displays whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the big hit lottery, Like the special symbol display device 60 (second special symbol display device 61), a plurality of LEDs may be used to display the type of special symbol as a result of the jackpot lottery.

  The normal symbol sub-display 69c is composed of one LED, and in the variable display of the normal symbol, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on or off in a mode showing the result of the winning lottery (a winning mode or a losing mode).

  The normal symbol sub-display 69c displays only whether or not it hits as a result of the winning lottery when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, but it is composed of a plurality of LEDs like the normal symbol display 62. Alternatively, the type of ordinary symbol may be displayed as a result of the jackpot lottery.

  The first special symbol holding sub-display 69d (second special symbol holding sub-display 69e) is composed of a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned first special symbol holding display 63 (second special symbol holding display 64). The number of rights (first hold) for performing the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) that is stored when the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 (ball) Is displayed, and is lit or blinks in a mode showing the number of first reservations. It should be noted that the maximum number of the first holdings is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

Specifically, if the first hold is one, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold sub-display 69d (second special symbol hold sub-display 69e) is lit, and the first hold is two The two LEDs of the first special symbol holding sub-display 69d (second special symbol holding sub-display 69e) are turned on. Further, when the first hold is three, the left LED of the first special symbol hold sub-display 69d (second special symbol hold sub-display 69e) blinks and the right LED lights up, and the first hold If there are four, two LEDs of the first special symbol holding sub-display 69d (second special symbol holding sub-display 69e) blinks.
The display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasing (lighting off) timing of the first special symbol holding sub-display 69d (second special symbol holding sub-display 69e) are displayed on the first image display device 70 described later. The display timing of the hold icon and the deletion timing are synchronized.

  The normal symbol holding sub-display 69f is composed of a plurality of LEDs similarly to the above-mentioned normal symbol holding display 65, and hits the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins the prize (gate) in the universal gate 44. This is for displaying the number of rights (general figure hold) for performing lottery (variable display of ordinary symbols), and is lit or blinking in a mode showing the number of common figure hold. It should be noted that although the maximum number of four universal figure reservations is stored, the number may be less than or more than four.

  Specifically, in the case of one universal figure hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold sub-display 69f is lit, and in the case of two universal figure hold, two of the normal symbol hold sub-display 69f The LED lights up. In addition, when there are three general figure reservations, the left LED of the normal symbol reservation sub-display 69f blinks and the right LED lights up, and when there are four general figure reservations, the normal symbol reservation sub-display Two LEDs of 69f blink.

The right-handed sub-display 69g is composed of one LED similarly to the right-handed display 67 described above, and is for promoting so-called right-handing.
It should be noted that the right-handing sub-display 69g is marked as "right-handed" as shown in FIG. 1, and prompts the player to right-hand rather than the right-handing display 67 having nothing written therein. It is a mode that is easy to recognize.

  A first image display device 70 including a liquid crystal display is provided in the interior of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70. Is provided with a second image display device 71 including a liquid crystal display whose size and display area are smaller than those of the first image display device 70. Above the effect space 40a, a second image display device 71 is provided for performing operation effects. Movable effect device 73 is provided.

  The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting effect that is performed while the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is performed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the jackpot game are being executed. There is a jackpot production etc.

  Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a moving effect by being moved by a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing the variable effect. Has become.

  Specifically, the standby position (first position) located closer to the end (lower side) of the first image display device 70 and the effect position (second position) closer to the center (upper) of the first image display device 70. The moving effect is performed by moving (up and down) in the vertical direction between the position and the position. The moving direction of the second image display device 71 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

  In the display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70, a variable display area for displaying three effect symbols 70a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and an effect mode relating to execution of the variable effect. , A mode display area and the like are formed.

  In addition, the effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols indicating numbers from "1" to "8", and variable display of special symbols executed by the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61. The variable display is started in response to the start of, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect design 70a, a design indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used.

  In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is adapted to be stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner (miss aspect, big hit aspect) showing the result of the special game determination (big hit determination). The big hit mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols 70a such as "777", and the lost mode is other modes.

  In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may be scrolling in the horizontal direction, or may be switched or rotated (rotated) on the spot. Good.

  Further, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display according to the result of the special game determination. By being displayed on the device 71, the player's expectation for the jackpot game (special game) being executed is increased.

  In the first image display device 70, a first hold icon display area 70C (first hold area) for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold display) corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1). ), Or a second hold icon display area 70D (second hold area) for displaying a second hold icon (second hold display) of a number corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2), and the special figure hold The icon display area 70E (digestion hold area) for displaying the icon (digestion hold display) indicating that the variation effect executed by subtracting the number is being formed is formed.

  The first hold icon display area 70C includes a first display portion 70C1 (first area), a second display portion 70C2 (second area), and a third display portion 70C3 (third area) from the side closer to the icon display area 70E. , 4th display part 70C4 (4th area), and the 1st reservation of the number corresponding to the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) is divided into the 1st display part 70C1-the 4th display part 70C4. The icon is displayed.

  Specifically, the first display unit 70C1 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70C2 displays the second hold icon. The first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third in the third display unit 70C3. The first hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70C4 displays the first hold icon indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

  The second hold icon display area 70D includes a first display portion 70D1 (first area), a second display portion 70D2 (second area), a third display portion 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display portion 70D4 (from the left side). The fourth display area 70D1 to the fourth display area 70D4 display the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special figure hold number (U2).

  Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon. The second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70D3 is the third in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The second hold icon indicating the hold storage is displayed, and the fourth display portion 70D4 displays the second hold icon indicating the second hold storage in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth.

  The icon display area 70E is formed immediately above the pedestal image for clearly distinguishing it from the first reserved icon display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D, and rides or floats on the pedestal image. The icon is displayed as shown.

  Specifically, the first hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 70C along with the start of the variable display of the first special design (effect design 70a) are displayed one by one toward the icon display area 70E. Moving (shifting), the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70C1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70E, and variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 70a) At the end of, the icon disappears (erases).

  Further, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D along with the start of the variable display of the second special design (effect design 70a) is moved one by one toward the icon display area 70E (shift). ) Then, the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 70E, and at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon disappears (erases). In addition, you may make the said icon disappear in the middle of the variable display of the special design (effect design 70a).

  In the embodiment of the present invention, the effect symbol 70a is variably displayed on the first image display device 70, but the effect symbol may be variably displayed on the second image display device 71. The effect symbol 70a may be variably displayed on both the image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

  The movable effect device 73 has an operable first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b, and the first movable member 73a and the first movable member 73a during execution of variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined action, it is possible to execute the action effect. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and are capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner during execution of action production. .

  Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end portion (upper side) of the first image display apparatus 70 and closer to the center (lower side) of the first image display apparatus 70. It is configured to move (raise and descend) with respect to the positioned effect position (second position). The second movable member 73b is provided between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position (position that has moved to the left and right) that retracts from the front of the first movable member 73a. It is designed to move.

  On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out the game balls based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition (prize ball, ball lending), a game supplied from an island facility or the like. In response to a payout control command from the main control device 110A, which has a game ball storage unit 96 that stores the balls and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control board 110 that totally controls the progress of the game And a payout control device 120A that includes a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 95, and an effect control device 130A that includes an effect control board 130 that controls the effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. , A power supply device 160A having a built-in power supply board 160 for supplying a power supply voltage to various control devices, a game information (game signal) outside the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer) Such game information output terminal board 90 for outputting is provided a.

  Further, an opening / closing door-type cover member 23 is provided in which the left and right other sides are opened and closed in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on the left and right sides so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire effect control device from the rear. In the effect control device 130A, the volume of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member 23, the image display devices 70 and 71, and various lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the illumination device 74).

(Structure of main controller)
Next, the configuration of the main controller 110A that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of main controller 110A.

  The main controller 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110 therein, and a sealing seal for restricting the opening of the board case. 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104.

  On the front side of the main control board 110, the contents stored in the main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m, are cleared, or at the stage of the advantage degree of the game (the game. RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, which changes the degree of advantage), and a signal for shifting the set value to a state in which the set value can be changed or a state in which the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the set key A setting key switch 112a for inputting, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that enable the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped are mounted.

  The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base value described later) described later, and is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP. . Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the 7-segment displays 113a and 113b, and the set values and the numerical values of the performance information are indicated by the 7-segment displays 113c and 113d. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information is configured.

  The substrate case has a recessed chamber-shaped lower case member 101 that opens at a portion facing the back surface side of the main control substrate 110, and a recessed chamber-shaped upper case member 102 that opens at a portion facing the front surface side of the main control substrate 110. By including the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 in a closed state, an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

  A sealing portion for sealing the board case with the lower case member 101 and the upper case member 102 in a state where the main control board 110 is housed is provided at an end portion of the board case, and a lower case member 101. A sticking portion for sticking the seal sticker 104 is provided across the upper case member 102.

  The sealing portion includes a lower fixing portion 101a provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper fixing portion 102a provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower fixing portion 101a. Then, the board case is sealed by screwing a one-way screw from the upper fixing portion 102a to the lower fixing portion 101a, the rotation of which is restricted in the removal direction.

  The sticking portion includes a lower sticking portion 101b provided on the lower case member 101 and an upper sticking portion 102b provided on the upper case member 102 so as to correspond to the lower sticking portion 101b. The substrate case is sealed by sticking the seal sticker 104 across the lower sticking portion 101b and the upper sticking portion 102b.

  The seal cover member 105 is formed in a recessed chamber shape with one side open. Then, the seal sticker 104 is protected by attaching it to the substrate case so as to include the sticking part in the state where the seal sticker 104 is stuck.

  On the upper surface of the upper case member 102, a model name sticker 106 on which a model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed and a management number sticker 107 on which a management number of the main control board 110 is printed are arranged side by side. It is attached in the state. An operation member 108 for pressing (turning on) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted in a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

  Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion 112 for inserting the setting key into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. The insertion portion 112 has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. is doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the key hole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the key hole, and is turned to the left. When it is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key comes out of the keyhole.

(Position relation of various elements)
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the positional relationship of various elements constituting the main controller 110A will be described. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the positional relationship of various elements that constitute main controller 110A.

  The model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107 are arranged above and below the step portion formed in the lower portion of the upper case member 102 in the left-right direction, and are arranged side by side in the vicinity of the center of the upper case member 102 in the lateral direction. Is attached as follows. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm the print contents.

  The main control unit 110m, which is a one-chip microcomputer, is located at the center of the upper side of the main control board 110, at a position shifted upward so as not to overlap with the model name seal 106 and the management number seal 107, and the model number and It is mounted with the printing surface on which the product name etc. are printed facing up. Therefore, the main controller 110m can easily confirm the printed surface from the upper side of the substrate case without the visual confirmation being restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107.

  The information display 113 is mounted on the right side of the upper side of the main control board 110 and laterally side-by-side in a position shifted rightward and upward so as not to overlap with the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 in the front and back. Has been done. Therefore, the information display 113 can easily confirm the display content without being restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107.

  In the sealing sticker 104, the portion stuck on the upper surface (front surface) of the sticking portion formed by the upper sticking portion 102b is closer to the main control board 110 than the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 ( , And between the upper surface of the information display 113), and the portion attached to the lower surface (bottom surface) of the attaching section formed by the lower attaching section 101b is located below (back side) the information display 113. is doing.

  It should be noted that as the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit section including four 7-segment displays and a board is unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable that the model name sticker 106 and the management number sticker 107 are arranged so as not to overlap with each other so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded).

  Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. The main control board 110 may be mounted and connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

  Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, but may be provided on the power supply board 160 at a position where the player cannot operate, It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main controller 110m.

  Further, because the signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value is not input by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or as a position where the player cannot operate the power supply board. It may be provided on 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

  Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board contained in the board case of the main control board 110, and The performance information may be displayed on one of the display units and the set value may be displayed on the other display unit.

(Block diagram of the entire game machine)
Next, the control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the gaming machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

  As the control configuration of the present embodiment, a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic operation), and a payout control that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110. Board 120, production control board 130 for controlling the production related to the game based on reception of production control command from main control board 110, and power supply board for supplying power to main control board 110, payout control board 120 and production control board 130 It is equipped with 160.

  The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received bidirectionally, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is performed from the main control board 110. It is configured to be able to send commands to the substrate 130 in only one direction.

  The main control board 110 is a main control unit as a one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program and the like, a main RAM 110c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like. It is equipped with 110m.

  At the input / output port of the main controller 110m, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detecting switch 45a, a second starting opening detecting switch 47a, a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, a first large opening. Winning hole detection switch 50a, first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second big winning opening detecting switch 53a, second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b, magnetic detection sensor 55a, radio wave detection sensor 56a, out ball detection switch 57a, first 1 special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, ordinary symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator 63, second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, number of rounds indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, status confirmation indicator 68, game information output terminal board 90, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 12a, the information display 113, dispensing control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is connected.

  The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoid, display, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (such as a hall computer) via the game information output terminal board 90 are performed.

  The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launching device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

  The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

  To the input / output port of the payout control unit 121, an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout ball from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that the game balls are stored in the payout motor 95b and the game ball storage unit 96 is connected.

  The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing relating to payout of gaming balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. Thereby, the control process for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 according to the payout control command from the main control board 110, the control process for transmitting the command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, and the like. To do.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input / output port, and the like, which are not shown.
The ball feed solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the firing volume 15b, the firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 122.

  When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b are allowed to be energized and fired. When it is detected by the detection signal from the volume 15b that the turning angle of the firing handle 15 is changed, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is driven and the firing solenoid is controlled to have a firing strength corresponding to the turning angle of the firing handle 15. 28b is driven to shoot game balls (99.9 / minute).

  The production control board 130 controls the production control unit 130m that comprehensively controls the progress of the production based on the reception of the production control command from the main control board 110, and the image display based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m. A display control unit 140 that performs control processing of audio output, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light emitting members (LEDs and the like) and various drive sources (motors and the like) based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m. Is equipped with.

  The effect control unit 130m includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

  An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130m.

  The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs the operation processing related to the effect while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. Thereby, according to the control process for determining the effect mode of the variable effect, the control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, and the detection signal from various input devices (detection switch or the like). Control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting device, motor, etc.).

  The display control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, controls to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined sound. And control to output sound.

  The display control unit 140 controls the image display and the sound output based on the reception of the production control command from the production control unit 130m, and the display control command (display list) from the overall control unit 141. An image control unit 145 that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data and the like, and a voice output based on reception of a voice control command from the general control unit 141. A voice control unit 148 for controlling the device 9 and a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored are provided.

  The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that is a work area during arithmetic processing, and an image control unit 145 and an audio control unit 148 that are connected. It has an output port.

  The general CPU 141a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting the display control command to the display control unit 140, a voice output device. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be output from 9 and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 is performed.

  The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

  At the input / output port of the lamp control unit 150, the frame lighting device 10, the button driving motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, the board lighting device 74, and the second game information display device. 69 (first special symbol sub-display 69a, second special symbol sub-display 69b, normal symbol sub-display 69c, first special symbol holding sub-display 69d, second special symbol holding sub-display 69e, normal symbol holding The sub-display 69f and the right-handed sub-display 69g) are connected.

  The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the button drive motor 17b, the button vibration motor 17c, the button light emitting LED 17d, the movable effect device 73, the board lighting device 74, and the second game information display device 69 is performed.

  The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the game machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the game machine, and supplies the main power supply to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, Supply to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components (corresponding to a power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (power failure has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (power failure has occurred). A disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 when the power supply is cut off (power failure) are provided.

  Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power supply is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started. Even when the power switch is in the OFF state, the backup power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control unit 130m is maintained.

  The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, and detects the voltage drop detection signal. When the power supply voltage becomes higher than a predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

  The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when the game machine is energized, and the power supply voltage for backup stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off (power failure) is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power cut (power failure) after recovery from the power cut (power failure). You can

  Although the payout control board 120 is not supplied with backup power, the payout control board 120 may be supplied with backup power so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). .

  Although the backup power is not supplied to the effect control unit 130m, the backup power may be supplied to the effect control unit 130m so that the stored contents of the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure).

(Explanation of game state)
Next, a game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low-probability game state" and a "high-probability game state" as states related to special game determination (big hit determination), and "non-time saving game" as a state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting opening 47. It has a "state" and a "time saving game state". Therefore, in this embodiment,
(1) "Low probability non-time saving game state" which is a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state,
(2) "Low probability time-short game state", which is a low-probability game state and a time-short game state,
(3) The "high-probability time-short game state", which is a high-probability game state and a time-short game state, is provided.

  The initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. Also, the gaming state during the big hit game is also set to the "low probability non-time saving game state", but it is a gaming state different from the normal gaming state.

  Here, the "low-probability game state" is, for example, a stage of the degree of advantage of the game (when the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) is "1", the first start opening 45 or the second start In a special game determination (big hit determination) performed on the condition that a game ball enters the mouth 47, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1/300, which is a low game state.

  On the other hand, the "high probability game state" means that when the setting value is "1", the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high value of about 1/60, which is higher than that of the low probability game state. A game state that is advantageous to. The transition from the low-probability game state to the high-probability game state is performed after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, the "non-time saving game state" is the auxiliary game determination (hit determination) performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the universal figure gate 44, and the winning probability per hit is set as low as 1/16, which is normal. It means a game state in which the average time of variable display of symbols is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting opening 47 when winning is set to 0.2 seconds.

  On the other hand, the "time saving game state" means that the winning probability per winning is set as high as 15/16, the average time for the variable display of the normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and the winning case when winning is won. By setting the opening time of the 2 start port 47 to 5 seconds, the game state is advantageous for the player in which the consumption of the game ball is suppressed as compared with the non-time saving game state. The transition from the non-time saving game state to the time saving game state is performed after the jackpot game is over.

  It should be noted that the "time saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "non-time saving game state" in terms of the average variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47, and the winning probability of the winning lottery. Alternatively, only one of the average variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting opening 47 and the winning probability of the winning lottery may be set to be advantageous.

  Also, the winning probability in the auxiliary game determination in the non-time saving game state is the same without changing by the set value, but it may be changed by the setting value so that the larger the setting value becomes, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good. Also, the winning probability in the auxiliary game determination in the time saving game state is the same without changing by the set value, but it may be changed by the setting value so that the larger the setting value becomes, the more advantageous the winning probability becomes. Good.

(Memory map of main controller)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area including the main ROM 110b and the main RAM 110c of the main controller 110m.

  The memory area of the main controller 110m includes a memory area (8000H to FFFFH) assigned to the main ROM 110b and a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) assigned to the main RAM 110c.

  The memory area of the main ROM 110b is a game ROM area (8000H to 9FFFH) in which programs and data relating to the progress of a game are stored, and an information ROM area (A000H in which programs and data relating to performance display of a gaming machine are stored. ~ A52EH), an unused area of 16 bytes or more (A52FH to A6FFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a ROM comment area (A700H to) in which data such as program title and version is stored. A77FH), a vector table area (A780H to A7A7H) in which a start address of a timer interrupt process described later is set, and an HW parameter area (A7A8H to A7A8H in which parameters such as a start address and an end address of an access prohibited area are set. A7FFFH) are arranged in order.

  The game ROM area includes a game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a first unused area (8BDDH to 8FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ), A game data area (9000H to 9976H) in which data relating to the progress of the game is stored, and a second unused area (9977H to 9FFFH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored in order. It is arranged.

  The information ROM area is an information program area (A000H to A437H) in which a program related to performance of the gaming machine is stored, and an unused area (A438H to A47FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. Then, the information data area (A480H to A52EH) in which the data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored is sequentially arranged.

  The memory area of the main RAM 110c is a game RWM area (0000H to 018FH) used as a work (work area) when the game program is executed, and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed. (0190H to 01FFH) are arranged in order.

  The game RWM area includes a game work area (0000H to 0128H) used as a work by the game program, a first unused area (0129H to 0171H) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, A game stack area (0172H to 017FH) for temporarily saving the data being processed by the game program, and a second unused area (0180H to 018FH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored. ) Are arranged in order.

  In the game work area, a set value area for storing a set value, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and changes depending on the progress of the game. A game data area for storing game data is arranged in order.

  The information RWM area includes an information work area (0190H to 01E8H) used as a work by the information program, an unused area (01E9H to 01EAH) in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and an information program. The information stack areas (01EBH to 01FFH) for temporarily saving the data being processed are sequentially arranged.

  In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information on the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information on various error determinations are sequentially arranged.

(Dump list of RWM area)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a dump list when the contents of the memory area of the main controller 110m are output to a printer or a display. In FIG. 8, a plurality of areas surrounded by squares are unused areas in which “0” is stored.

  In the game RWM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set over 73 bytes or more between the game work area (0000H to 0128H) and the game stack area (0172H to 017FH). . Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game work area and the game stack area is formed by the unused area, and the game work area and the game stack area can be easily made in the debugging work and inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the RWM area for information, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 2 bytes between the work area for information (0190H to 01E8H) and the stack area for information (01EBH to 01FFH). Therefore, a boundary that separates the information work area and the information stack area is formed by the unused area, and the information work area and the information stack area can be easily identified in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

  Also, an unused area in which "0" is stored after the game stack area (0172H to 017FH) is set from 1680H, which is a multiple of 16, to 16 bytes, and after this unused area, an information work area ( (0190H to 01E8H) is set from 0190H which is a multiple of 16. Therefore, a boundary line that separates the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area is formed by the unused area, and the gaming RWM area and the information RWM area can be easily provided in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the game ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 1059 bytes between the game program area (8000H to 8BDCH) and the game data area (9000H to 9976H). Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game program area and the game data area is formed by the unused area, and the game program area and the game data area can be easily separated in the debugging work or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the information ROM area, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set for 72 bytes between the information program area (A000H to A437H) and the information data area (A480H to A52EH). Therefore, a boundary that separates the information program area and the information data area is formed by the unused area, and the information program area and the information data area can be easily identified in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to (recognize).

  Also, an unused area in which "0" is stored is set to 1673 bytes after the game data area (9000H to 9976H), and the information program area is a multiple of 16 after this unused area. It is set. Therefore, a boundary line that separates the game ROM area and the information ROM area is formed by the unused area, so that the game ROM area and the information ROM area can be easily provided in the debugging operation or inspection of the gaming machine 1. It becomes possible to identify (recognize).

  In the game ROM area and the information ROM area, an unused area of 16 bytes or more is provided between the program area and the data area, but the unused area may be 16 bytes or less, or the program area. It is not necessary to provide an unused area between the data area and the data area.

  Also, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game ROM area, this unused area is not provided in the game ROM area, but at the beginning of the information ROM area (before the information program area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game ROM area and the information ROM area (between the game data area and the information program area) so as not to belong to the game ROM area and the information ROM area. It is also possible to provide an unused area.

  Further, in the game RWM area and the information RWM area, an unused area of a predetermined byte is provided between the work area and the stack area, but this unused area may be 16 bytes or more, or 16 bytes. The following may be adopted, or an unused area may not be provided between the data area and the stack area.

  Further, although an unused area is provided at the end of the game RWM area, this unused area is not provided in the game RWM area, but is provided at the beginning of the information RWM area (before the information work area). An unused area may be provided, or between the game RWM area and the information RWM area (between the game stack area and the information work area) so as not to belong to the game RWM area and the information RWM area. It is also possible to provide an unused area.

(Relationship between game area and information area)
FIG. 9 shows a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on the game program, and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on the information program. It is a figure which shows the relationship with.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the main CPU 110a basically refers to the game data area when performing processing based on the game program, and uses the game RWM area as a work for the game. The contents of the RWM area are referred to and updated. Further, when performing the processing based on the information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the content of the information RWM area is referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

  However, in the processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the process based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the process based on the game program, and then the information program is called to use the information program. The flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is executed and the process based on the information program is completed and the game program is restored.

  Also, immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are set as the information RWM area. The register for the game stack area is restored by saving all registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program from the information RWM area.

  By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing the processing based on the information program, and when the information program returns to the game program, inconvenience occurs. Will disappear.

  Next, the details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Big hit judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, which is referred to in a special game determination (jack determination) performed based on the winning (ball) of the game ball into the first starting opening 45, and FIG. 10 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol that is referred to in the special game determination (big hit determination) performed based on the winning (ball) of the game ball into the second starting opening 47.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), in the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, the current setting value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination random number value, the jackpot determination determination The results (big hit, small hit, lost) are associated with each other, and the approximate winning probability in the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is described in the rightmost column for reference.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol, the current set value, the probability game state when performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination random number value, jackpot determination Is associated with the determination result (big hit, lost), and for reference, the approximate probability in the case of "big hit" is described in the rightmost column.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (b), and the current setting value, the current probability game. Based on the state and the random number for jackpot determination, it is determined which of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

  For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the setting value is "1" and the low probability game state, 200 of "100" to "299" The jackpot determination random number value is determined to be a "big hit", and when in the high probability game state, 1000 big hit determination random number values of "100" to "1099" are determined to be a "big hit". In addition, regardless of whether it is the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, the 200 big-hit determination random number values “2000” to “2199” are determined as “small hits”. Therefore, the random number for jackpot determination other than the jackpot or the small hit is determined to be “miss”.

  As a feature of the jackpot determination table for the special symbol shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot probability changes depending on the set value, but the jackpot probability does not change and is constant. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  The probability of being a jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of being a jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value), but it is a jackpot. The probability of being performed is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

  In addition, the big hit determination table for the second special symbol, the small hit is not set, but the small hit may be set to have the same probability as the big hit determination table for the first special symbol, The small hit may be set so as to have a different probability from the big hit determination table for the first special symbol.

  Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the jackpot probability is). On the contrary, the smaller the set value is, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the jackpot probability is). You may

  Further, in all the set values (1 to 4), the probability of being determined as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and / or the high-probability game state, for example, two or three set values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined as a big hit may be the same in the low-probability game state and / or the high-probability game state.

  Further, the set value of the present embodiment has four stages of 1 to 4, but the set value is not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 11 (a) is a special symbol determination table for a big hit that is referred to when determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is determined to be a big hit, and FIG. 11 (b) is a special symbol when it is determined to be a loss. It is a special symbol determination table for the loss referred to when determining the stop symbol of the symbol, FIG. 11 (c), for the small hit referred to when determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be a small hit. It is a special symbol determination table.

  As shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C, in the special symbol determination table, the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol, the random number for the special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol determination, and this determination The stop special figure data indicating the result and the special symbol designation command indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination are associated with each other.

  Special symbols "01" and "04" are jackpot special symbols that execute the first jackpot game in which 16 rounds of games are performed, and special symbols "02" and "05" are 16 rounds. It is a jackpot special symbol that executes the second jackpot game in which the game is executed, and "03" is a jackpot special symbol that executes the third jackpot game in which two round games are executed. Further, the special symbols "00" and "10" are lost special symbols in which the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, the special symbol “20” is a small hit special symbol in which a small hit game is executed.

  It should be noted that, although one lost special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of lost special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 11 (a) to (c), and the type of the special symbol for determining the stop symbol and the special symbol based on the random number for special symbol determination The type, the stop special figure data, and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the types of big hit special symbols, the types of lost special symbols, and the types of small hit special symbols are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game play is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. At least one of the big hit special symbol and the small hit special symbol may be one type.

  The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratios of various jackpot special symbols, the selection ratios of various lost symbols, and the selection ratios of various small hit symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. Is mentioned. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special map variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12 is a special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state that is referred to when determining a variation pattern of the special symbol in the non-time saving game state, and FIG. 13 is determination of a variation pattern of the special symbol in the time saving game state. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving game state which is sometimes referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of special symbol to be displayed variably, the determination result of the jackpot determination, the determination result of the special symbol (stop special figure data), Reach determination random number value, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random number value, special figure fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, special symbol And the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command indicating the special figure fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

  Therefore, it can be said that the "special figure variation pattern" can specify at least the type of the special symbol, the determination result of the jackpot determination, and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, if the jackpot judgment result is lost, the reach determination random value is referenced, but in the case of a jackpot, the reach occurs except in special cases, so the reach determination random value is not referenced. Has been done.

  In the special figure variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, when the result of the jackpot determination is lost, the special figure reservation number (first special figure reservation number, second special figure reservation number) increases. The variation pattern is determined so that the variation time of the special symbol becomes short.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and determines the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special figure data), the reach determination random number value, the first special figure hold Number (U1) or second special figure reservation number (U2), based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are determined, and the special figure A variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

  Further, as will be described later, the effect control board 130 is configured to determine the content of the variable effect (effect mode) based on the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern designation command), so that FIG. 12 and FIG. In the rightmost column of each special figure pattern determination table shown in (4), the effect contents that can be executed in the variable effect are described for reference.

  As the effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, “normal fluctuation”, “shortening fluctuation”, “long fluctuation”, and “ultra-shortening fluctuation” mean that the three effect symbols 70a are scattered at high speed. It means that it fluctuates and stops without reaching, the normal fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the long fluctuation, and the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation. The ultra-short change ends in a shorter change time than the short change.

  Further, "reach" means that the jackpot game is executed such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a are changed. It means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of three effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying the big hit (big hit result mode), the same effect symbol 70a is set to "7" in the left side region and the right side region. It temporarily stops and the remaining effect design 70a is changing in the central area.

  The "temporary stop" means that the effect design 70a sways slightly, or the effect design 70a is slightly deformed to make the player think that the effect design 70a is stopped (complete stop). Not) refers to the embodiment.

  Further, "normal reach" means a reach in which the same effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region, and the other effect symbol 70a changes in the central region, and the reach with the lowest expected jackpot. Has become. In this embodiment, the "normal reach" does not cause a big hit, but the "normal reach" may cause a big hit.

  The "SP reach" is a super reach that is performed after the normal reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach. For example, to the player that the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and the jackpot game is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It's designed to give you special expectations.

  In addition, "SPSP reach" is a special reach that is performed after super reach and has a higher expectation of jackpots than super reach. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special effect is performed rather than "SP reach" using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is like this.

  Also, the "full-reach reach" is a reach that is confirmed as a big hit. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and are changed at a low speed, and a special effect is performed rather than "SPSP reach" using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. There is.

  In addition, the "chance production" is a production that fuels whether it is a big hit or a small hit. For example, the three effect symbols 70a are reduced and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, but the reach state is not reached, and a special effect is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is like this.

  The first feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving game state rather than the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined in the non-time saving game state. In this case, it is easier to determine a relatively short fluctuation time (the average fluctuation time becomes shorter). Therefore, the variation time of the special symbol can be changed between the non-time saving game state and the time saving game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the types of the special figure variation patterns to be determined are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

  The third feature of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is that the selection ratios of the special figure fluctuation patterns are the same without changing according to the set values. By doing so, it becomes difficult to detect the set value from the special figure variation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

  The selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern may be changed for each set value, may be changed between an odd number setting and an even number setting, or may be a low setting (for example, 1-2). It may be changed depending on whether it is a high setting (for example, 3 to 4). In addition, a special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for each set value, a special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for one of the odd number setting and the even setting, and no special special figure fluctuation pattern is provided for the other. It is also possible to provide a special special figure variation pattern for one of the low setting and the high setting and not provide a special special figure variation pattern for the other.

(Preliminary judgment table)
FIG. 14 (a) is referred to in the preliminary determination for determining the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 45 before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It is a pre-determination table for special symbols, FIG. 14 (b), before the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 47 It is a figure which shows the prior determination table for the 2nd special symbol referred in the prior determination.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a) and FIG. 14 (b), the pre-determination table has a game state, a determination result of a jackpot determination, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for reach determination, and a special figure. The random number for fluctuation pattern determination, the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the starting mouth winning designation command indicating the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern are associated with each other.

  In the pre-determination of the special symbol determination information, it is possible to determine which of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" by the random number value for big hit determination, and it is possible to determine the type of special symbol by the random value for special symbol determination Since it is possible to determine in advance the type of the special pattern scheduled fluctuation pattern to be executed by the reach judgment random number value and the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, is it a big hit or a small hit from the starting mouth winning award designation command? Whether or not, it is possible to specify the special symbol type and the special symbol scheduled fluctuation pattern.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 (a) or FIG. 14 (b), and determines the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number value, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination disorder. Based on the numerical values, the special figure scheduled variation pattern and the starting mouth winning award designation command are determined, and the starting mouth winning award designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Big prize opening mode determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a special winning opening opening mode determination table for determining the opening mode of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 in the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the special winning opening opening mode determination table, the stop special figure data of the special symbol, the type of the special winning opening to be released, the maximum number of round games in the jackpot game, and the big winning opening in one round game. To the maximum number of winnings, the opening time from the start of the jackpot game to the execution of the first round game, the maximum number of times the big winning opening in each round game, and the opening of each round game The opening time of the special winning opening, the closing interval time for closing the special winning opening after the end of the round game, and the ending time from the end of the final round game to the end of the jackpot game are associated with each other.

  When the stop special figure data is "01", the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, and when the stop special figure data is "02", it is advantageous to the player over the first big jackpot game. If the special jackpot game data is "03", the third jackpot game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second jackpot game, is executed.

(Game state setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the jackpot game is over. In the gaming state setting table, special symbol stop special data, winning state data indicating the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, a time saving game flag indicating that it is a time saving game state, and a time saving game state can be executed. A time saving number (J) indicating the number of variable displays, a high probability game flag indicating a high probability game state, and a high probability number (X) indicating the number of variable displays executable in the high probability game state. It is associated.

  Here, the "winning state data" is information indicating the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. The game state is composed of a combination of a non-time saving game state, a time saving game state, a low probability game state and a high probability game state.

  The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data, a time saving game flag, a time saving number (J), a high probability game flag, and a high probability. The probability number (X) is determined.

  When the high-probability game state is set, 50,000 times may be set as the high-probability number (X), but in the high-probability game state, the jackpot winning probability is 1/60, Since the next big hit game is substantially decided, the second big hit game and the third big hit game are big hit games for which the next big hit game is decided.

  As a first feature of the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16, even with the same stop special figure data, based on the winning state data (gaming state at the time of jackpot winning), setting of the time saving game flag and the number of times saving time (J) may be different in some cases.

  Specifically, in the case of the stop special map data 01 (special symbol 01), "00H" indicating the low probability non-time saving game state is stored as the winning state data regarding the time saving game flag and the time saving number (J). If so, the time saving game flag is not set at the end of the jackpot game, and the time saving number (J) is set to 0 times. On the other hand, if "01H" indicating the low-probability time short game state or "02H" indicating the high-probability time short game state is stored as the winning state data, the time-shortening game flag is set at the end of the jackpot game. Set the number of hours saved (J) to 100 times. As a result, the number of hours saved (J) can be changed depending on the game state at the time of jackpot winning, and the player can be interested in the game state at the time of jackpot winning.

  The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the types of the time saving game flag and the high probability game flag that are set do not change depending on the set value and are the same. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Various storage areas in the game work area)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the game work area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a special diagram in which special figure determination information acquired when a game ball wins (enters) the first starting opening 45 and / or the second starting opening 47 is stored. 17B is a diagram showing the determination information storage area, FIG. 17B is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special figure determination information storage area, and FIG. FIG. 17D is a general-purpose figure determination information storage area in which general-purpose determination information acquired when passing is stored. FIG. 17D is a diagram showing a configuration of each storage unit in the general-purpose determination information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the special figure determination information storage area is a first special figure determination information holding storage in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 45 is stored. An area, a second special figure determination information holding storage area in which special figure determination information acquired based on winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 47 is stored, and special figure determination information in which variable display is being executed is stored. The special figure determination information storage area is divided into the first special figure determination information holding storage area and the second special figure determination information holding storage area, which are respectively divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section.

  The first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section, and the fourth storage section of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area are the first display section 70C1 and the second display of the first reservation icon display area 70C. It corresponds to the unit 70C2, the third display unit 70C3, and the fourth display unit 70C4, respectively. Further, the first storage section, the second storage section, the third storage section and the fourth storage section of the second special symbol reserved storage area are the first display section 70D1, the second display section 70D2 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, It corresponds to the third display unit 70D3 and the fourth display unit 70D4, respectively.

  Then, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the first special figure determination information storage area becomes the first special figure holding number (U1), and these special figure determinations are made. The number of first hold icons corresponding to the information is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 to the fourth display unit 70C4 of the first hold icon display area 70C. Further, the number of special figure determination information (holding information) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the second special figure determination information becomes the second special figure holding number (U2), which corresponds to these determination information. The number of hold icons is displayed on the first display unit 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D.

  The zeroth storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70E. Then, the icon corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage section is displayed in the icon display area 70E.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (b), each storage unit is a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing the jackpot determination random number value, and a special symbol determination random number storage for storing the special symbol determination random number value. It is divided into an area, a reach determination random number storage area for storing a reach determination random value, and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a special figure variation pattern determination random value.

  When the game ball is won (balled) in the first starting opening 45 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the first special figure determination information holding storage area. The acquired special figure determination information is stored in the storage unit having a small number. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 and the special figure determination information is acquired, the special figure determination information is not stored in the second special figure determination information holding storage area and has the smallest number. The special figure determination information acquired is stored in the storage unit.

  The 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, when the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied, the special figure stored in the first storage section of the first special figure determination information holding storage area The determination information will be shifted and referred to in order to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Moreover, when the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol determination information holding storage area is shifted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Will be referenced to perform.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the general figure determination information storage area and the general figure determination information storage area in which general figure determination information acquired based on the passage of a game ball to the general figure gate 44 is stored, and fluctuations. It is divided into a general figure determination information storage area for storing general figure determination information during display, and the general figure determination information holding storage area is divided from the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The number of public figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the public figure determination information holding storage area is the number of reserved public figure.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (d), each storage unit stores a hit determination random number storage area for storing a hit determination random number value, and a normal symbol judgment random number storage for storing a normal symbol judgment random value. It is divided into an area and a general-use figure fluctuation pattern determination random number storage area for storing a random number value for general-use fluctuation pattern determination.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the public figure gate 44 and the general figure determination information is acquired, the general figure determination information is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number in which the general figure determination information is not stored. The general-university-picture determination information is stored.

  The 0th storage unit, which is the general figure determination information execution storage area, shifts the general figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the general figure determination information holding storage area when the condition for starting variable display of ordinary symbols is satisfied. It is usually referred to for performing variable display of symbols.

  Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described using a flowchart. In the following description, a process that is not specified to be a process based on an information program is a process based on a game program.

(Main processing of main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

  First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, a preparation process for starting the control of the game, a setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c for initializing the RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, and the like are performed. The details of the initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random number value and the reach determination random number value, and in step S51, the big hit determination initial random number value, the special symbol determination initial random number value, the hit determination initial random number value, Normally the initial random number for symbol determination is updated.

  In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating that a voltage drop has occurred in the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the supply power supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts). It is determined whether or not a signal is input. When the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process proceeds to step S50, and when the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process proceeds to step S53.

  In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the power is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, it is determined that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S54. If it is not continued for the predetermined period of time, a momentary power failure in which the power supply voltage drops for a moment is possible. If so, the process proceeds to step S52.

  In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt, and in step S55, issues a power shutdown command to notify the payout control board 120 that the power shutdown process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120, which has received the power-off instruction command, transmits the remaining payout amount designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

  In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout amount designation command has been received. If the remaining payout amount designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57, and if the remaining payout amount designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

  In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting to receive the remaining payout amount designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58 on the assumption that normal communication with the payout control board 120 cannot be performed.

  In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout amount in the payout counter set in the game RWM area. Specifically, when the remaining payout amount designation command is received, the remaining payout amount specified by the remaining payout amount designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout amount designation command is not received, Save "0" as the number of payouts. In addition, the remaining payout amount saved here is referred to in a payout control process of a timer interrupt, which will be described later, and a payout amount designation command according to the remaining payout amount is transmitted to the payout control board 120 after the power is restored. become.

  The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized and the operation of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) is stopped.

  In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c, and saves the checksum in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

  In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up in a predetermined area of the game RWM area (power is restored), and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

  In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initialization processing is performed, but with the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed, so the game The machine does not perform an unintended operation, and it is possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

  It should be noted that when a power failure (complete power failure) occurs, the checksum of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program and saved in the game RWM area, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated and saved in the information RWM area.

(Main control board initial setting process)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

  First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of internal registers in step S12, and waits for activation of another board in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second until the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are activated so that no command is missed from the main control board 110.

  The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designating command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launch of the game ball by the launching device 26.

  In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 as the power restoration, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 as the first power-on.

  In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process shifts to step S19 as a shift to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process shifts to step S20.

  The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to step S24.

  In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the game RWM area), the process moves to step S21. If the checksum is not normal (there is abnormality in the data in the game RWM area), The processing moves to step S22.

  When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

  In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value of the set value (during game) area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). When it is determined that the set value of the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and when it is determined that the set value of the set value (during game) area is not within the appropriate range. In step S22, the process proceeds to step S22.

The "set value (during game) area" is an area in which the set value is saved when the mode is not in the setting change mode, and in which the confirmed set value is saved. The set value range in the set value (during game) area is "1 to 4", which is a value obtained by adding 1 to the set value in the set value (during change) area.
The “setting value (during change) area” is an area in which the setting value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (during change) area is 0 to 3, which is a value obtained by subtracting -1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area.
In addition, when it is simply referred to as a “set value area”, it is a “set value (in game) area” and a “set value (in change) area”.

  The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S22. Specifically, after displaying the error information “E” indicating the non-recoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred to the effect control board 130. , Set the interrupt prohibition to prohibit the timer interrupt, and after outputting the output port, output the unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "non-recoverable error" is an error state in which the game control is not performed (the control of the game is not transferred), and cannot be released unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when a non-recoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without performing the setting change operation, the error is not released and the setting is not canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. During a non-recoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.
The "non-recoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but may be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The “non-recoverable error notification” is a notification for recognizing that a non-recoverable error has occurred, and is a non-recoverable error screen (“non-recoverable error. Change setting” on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please perform "), turn on the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. A non-recoverable error sound (“It is a non-recoverable error” + buzzer sound) that indicates that the power is cut off is output.
In addition, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 74 may be collectively referred to as “production device”.

  In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If the RWM clear operation is performed, the process is moved to step S24 as the RWM clear operation is executed, and if the RWM clear operation is not performed, the process is moved to step S26.

  The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, processing for initializing the control state of the game (initializing other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed. The details of the RWM clear processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to step S25.

  In step S25, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the low-probability non-time saving game state as a normal game state) and the payout control board 120 and It transmits to the production control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the image display devices 70 and 71 have an initial screen at the time of power-on (background image and initial effect design "135"). ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all turned on with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area from the audio output device 9 is displayed. A power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that the initialization has been performed is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70, 71, a display for notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70, 71.

  In step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S27 as the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before power-off. The processing moves to step S28.

  The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S27. Specifically, processing for displaying the setting value saved in the setting value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 is performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S28, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is cut off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

  In step S29, the main CPU 110a transmits, to the effect control board 130, a power supply restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like to be described later and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

The "power recovery notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 display the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power recovery. The pattern “135”) is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are all turned on with a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 is used. Is to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been recovered (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power supply restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to notify that the power supply is restored.

  In step S30, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special symbol storage designation command, a normal symbol storage designation command, etc. described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and the process for displaying the first reservation icon or the second reservation icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. .

  In step S31, the main CPU 110a sends a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition to the timing of this step S31, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted every time the jackpot game is started. May be.

  The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, permits all interrupts in step S33, and ends this initial setting process. .

  In this way, with regard to the setting change operation, since multiple conditions (operations) are set, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so it is possible to suppress fraud and improve the security of the gaming machine. It becomes possible.

  In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set in the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set in the RWM clear operation and the setting confirmation operation, the most illegal setting change is illegal. It is possible to increase the security of an event in which an action is easily performed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraud.

  In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation and is annoying to the game store or the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without playing the game.

  In addition, if the value of the set value (during game) area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, an unrecoverable error By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game will not proceed in the state where the setting value which the game store side does not intend is set, and the reliability of the gaming machine is improved. It becomes possible.

  The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include the condition that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions is increased, and thus fraudulent acts can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

  Further, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (first power-on) and it is determined that the setting change operation has not been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S20, non-recoverable error processing is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears to 0) and sets the initial value " 1 ”may be saved and the process may be moved to step S25.

  When it is determined that the backup flag is present (power is restored) and the setting change operation is not performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S20, non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program, and the initial value "1" is set in the setting value (during game) area. May be saved and the process may be moved to step S25.

  In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-restoration designation command are transmitted including the information indicating the current gaming state, but after the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted, the current gaming state You may make it transmit the game state designation | designated command which shows.

  In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, a checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, it is advisable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

  In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of all RWM areas may be calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the process may be shifted to the non-recoverable error processing.

(Main control board setting change process)
The setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs a process of outputting a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts outputting a setting change signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is ended.

  In step S19-2, the state confirmation display 68 displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. As a result, the game shop staff can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

  In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs the processing for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

  The “setting change notification” means that a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, or the setting of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 is being changed. That is, all lights are emitted in a predetermined emission color (for example, white). Note that a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9. Thereby, the game shop staff can confirm that the setting is being changed by checking the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9.

  In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a decrements the set value of the set value (during game) area by -1 and saves it in the set value (during change) area, and in step S19-5, sets the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Initialize (clear to 0) the set value (during game) area.

  In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value of the set value (during change) region is within the proper range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value of the set value (changing) area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value of the set value (changing) area is not within the proper range. If so, the process moves to step S19-7.

  When it is determined in step S19-6 that the set value of the set value (changing) area is not within the proper range, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value "in step S19-7" to the set value of the set value (changing) area. 0 ”is set.

  The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-8. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming shop staff to confirm the set value before the change by checking the information display device 113.

  In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If the setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-10, and if the setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-13.

  The main CPU 110a updates the set value of the set value (changing) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated set value is "4" that exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the process of correcting the set value to "0" is performed.

  The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S19-12. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming shop staff to grasp the set value before being confirmed by checking the information display 113.

  In step S19-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is a setting value confirming operation. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the set value confirmation operation is performed, it is determined that the set value is confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and the process proceeds to step S19-14. If the set value confirmation operation is not performed, the set value is updated. Then, the processing moves to step S19-9 on the assumption that there is a possibility.

  In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a increments the setting value of the setting value (changing) area by 1 to save it in the setting value (playing) area, and in step S19-15, sets the setting value (changing) area. Initialize the value (clear to 0).

  In step S19-16, the main CPU 110a terminates the display of the setting value on the information display 113, terminates the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S19-17, and terminates the current setting change processing.

  In this way, even if the set value is not within the proper range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an undefined value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is unexpectedly set. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing trouble to the game store and the player due to the operation.

  Also, during the setting change process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detecting switch 45a, second starting opening detecting switch 47a, The presence or absence of signal input from the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) is not monitored.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (winning) of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) By not monitoring (detecting) (a payout amount designation command to be described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), even if a winning occurs during the setting change process, the winning is invalidated and the gaming balls are not paid out. It is not supposed to be done. Also, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command described below is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), even if an error occurs during the setting change process, error notification is not performed. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting change.

  Further, the game store clerk, during the setting change (during the setting change mode), on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1, the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 74, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back side). That is, it is possible to know whether the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, although the setting key switch 112a is assumed to be in the OFF state from the ON state for the set value confirming operation, it may be possible that the RWM clear switch 111a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 to change the touch sensor 15a from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a or the like) provided at a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be possible that it is turned on.

  Also, the setting change designation command is sent at the start of the setting change process and the power-on designation command is sent after the setting change process is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is sent. However, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process is completed.

(Modification of setting change process)
A modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a modification of the setting change process of the main control board 110. Here, only the parts different from the setting change process of FIG. 20 will be described, and the same parts will be denoted by the same step numbers and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the modification of the setting change process shown in FIG. 21, steps S19-13A and S19-13B are provided between steps S19-13 and S19-14 in the setting change process shown in FIG.

  The main CPU 110a displays the confirmed set value on the information display 113 in step S19-13A. Specifically, the setting value displayed on the 7-segment LED of the information display 113 is maintained, and the DP (decimal point) of the 7-segment LED displaying the setting value is turned on. Thereby, it becomes possible for the gaming shop staff to confirm the set value by confirming the information display 113, and to grasp the confirmed set value.

  In step S19-13B, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the RW clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a setting change end operation, the process proceeds to step S19-14 to end the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change end operation, the process of step S19-13B is repeated.

  In this way, since the confirmed set value is displayed on the information display 113 until the setting change end operation is performed, the confirmed set value can be accurately grasped, and the game store staff may overlook the confirmed set value. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

  Further, since the display mode of the set value before confirmation and the display mode of the set value after confirmation are different, it is possible to accurately grasp that the set value has been confirmed, and the setting change is completed before the setting value confirmation operation is performed. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of performing an operation.

  It should be noted that although the setting change end operation is performed by setting the RWM clear switch 111a from the OFF state to the ON state, it may be possible that the open detection switch 31a is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch is turned OFF. The state may be changed to the ON state, or the signal from the touch sensor 15a may be input to the main control board 110 to change the touch sensor 15a from the OFF state to the ON state. The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a or the like) provided at a specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state.

(Main control board RWM clear processing)
The RWM clearing process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the RWM clear processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S 24-2, and the set value is not within the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). In that case, the process proceeds to step S24-5.

  In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 1), and the data (other than the set value) in the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

  In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a performs an output process of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

  In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130, and ends the RWM clear processing of this time.

  The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S24-5. Specifically, the set value error information “E” is displayed on the information display 113, and after the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the timer interruption is performed. After setting the interrupt prohibition that prohibits the output port and clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error, and supplies power. Process to wait until is completely turned off.

  In this way, when the set value is not in the proper range, the game machine stops unexpectedly by executing the non-recoverable error process that stops the game progress and stops the game progress. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game store and the player due to the above.

  Further, during the RWM clear process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detecting switch 45a, second starting opening detecting switch 47a, The presence or absence of signal input from the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) is not monitored.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (winning) of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) By not monitoring (detecting) (the payout amount designation command described below is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), even if a winning occurs during the RWM clearing process, the winning is invalidated and the gaming balls are not paid out. It is not supposed to be done. Further, by not monitoring (detecting) the occurrence of various errors (the error designation command is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), even if an error occurs during the RWM clear processing, error notification is not performed. ing. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during RWM clear, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing and reduce the processing load.

  If it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not within the proper range, the process returns to non-recoverable error processing, but if it is determined in step S24-1 that the set value is not within the proper range. Alternatively, the initial value "1" may be set as the set value and the process may proceed to step S24-2.

  Further, the RWM clear designation command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the end of the RWM clear processing. However, the RWM clear start designation command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear designation command. However, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear processing, or may be transmitted after the RWM clear processing is completed.

  Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear processing is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clear processing may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation processing of the main control board 110.

  First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the setting value saved in the setting value (during game) area of the game RWM area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If the set value is within the proper range (the setting change process has been performed in the past), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and the set value is not within the proper range (the setting change process has not been performed in the past). In that case, the process proceeds to step S27-9.

  In step S27-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, output of a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

  In step S27-3, the main CPU 110a displays a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the state confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. As a result, the gaming shop staff can confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display device 68.

  The main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S27-4. Thereby, the process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting control is performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

  “Setting confirmation notification” means that a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are being set. That is, all lights are emitted with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). Note that a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9. As a result, the game shop staff can confirm that the setting is being confirmed by checking the image display devices 70 and 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9.

  The main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113 in step S27-5. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, it becomes possible for the gaming shop staff to grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

  In step S27-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the confirmation end operation is performed, the process proceeds to step S27-7. If the confirmation end operation is not performed, the process of step S27-6 is repeated.

  The main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S27-7, ends the display of the state confirmation display 68 in step S27-8, and ends the current setting change process.

  The main CPU 110a performs a non-recoverable error process in step S27-9. Specifically, the set value error information “E” is displayed on the information display 113, and after the non-recoverable error designation command indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the timer interruption is performed. Disable the interrupt, output the non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 after clearing the output port, and complete power supply Wait until it is rejected.

  In this way, when the set value is not in the proper range, the game machine stops unexpectedly by executing the non-recoverable error process that stops the game progress and stops the game progress. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game store and the player due to the above.

  Also, during the setting confirmation process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detecting switch 45a, second starting opening detecting switch 47a, The presence or absence of signal input from the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, and the out ball detection switch 57a) is not monitored.

  In other words, the occurrence of winning (winning) of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) By not monitoring (detecting) (a payout amount designation command to be described later is not transmitted to the payout control board 120), even if a winning occurs during the setting confirmation process, the winning is invalidated and the payout of game balls is not possible. It is not supposed to be done. Moreover, since the occurrence of various errors is not monitored (detected) (the error designation command is not transmitted to the effect control board 130), error notification based on the occurrence of an error during the setting confirmation process is not performed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load without performing unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during setting confirmation.

  If it is determined in step S26-1 that the set value is not within the proper range, the initial value "1" is set to the set value instead of proceeding to the non-recoverable error processing, and the process of step S26-2 is performed. You may make it shift.

  In addition, the setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation processing and the power restoration specification command is transmitted after the setting confirmation processing ends. However, instead of the setting confirmation specification command, the setting confirmation start specification command is transmitted. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the setting confirmation end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be transmitted after the setting confirmation process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and the convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

  The setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the non-recoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common signal terminal.

  Further, during execution of the setting change process, the RWM clear process, and the setting confirmation process, input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a (general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening) Signal input from the detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the magnetic detection sensor 55a, the radio wave detection sensor 56a, the out ball detection switch 57a) The presence or absence of is not monitored, but it may be monitored. In this case, only the presence or absence of signal input from the input device may be monitored, or the signal input of only a specific input device related to security such as the magnetic detection sensor 55a and the radio wave detection sensor 56a may be monitored. An error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 when there is an input.

(Main RAM initialization timing and initialization area)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the relationship between the initialization timing and the initialization area of the main RAM 110c.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the initialization timing of the main RAM 110c may be accompanied by a setting change (hereinafter referred to as "setting change") or not accompanied by a setting change (hereinafter referred to as "RWM clear"). The setting can be changed in either the case where the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is normal or the case where the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is abnormal.

  In the game RWM area, a set value area (set value (in game) area, set value (in change) area) in which set values are stored, a determination information area in which a checksum of the main RAM 110c is stored, and a game The data area for game in which the data related to the progress of the game is stored, the error information area in which the information used to determine various errors is stored, the stack area for saving the data, and the unused area where neither data is stored. And are provided.

  In the information RWM area, a performance information area in which information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 (a game ball count value described later, a normal base value described later) is stored, and a stack area for saving data And an unused area in which the data is not stored.

  When the initialization trigger is a setting change and the RWM area is abnormal, areas other than the information RWM area are initialized (cleared to 0). Also, when the initialization trigger is the setting change process and the RWM area is not abnormal, the areas other than the information RWM area are initialized (cleared to 0). On the other hand, if the initialization trigger is RWM clear, areas other than the setting value area (setting value (in game) area, setting value (changing) area) and information RWM area are initialized (cleared to 0). It has become so.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 110.

  In this timer interrupt process, after the initialization process of the main process is completed, a clock pulse is input from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 110 at every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds). It will be executed.

  First, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area in step S100, and performs the time control process in step S110. Specifically, the process of updating various timer counters such as the stop time of the special symbol and the opening time of the special electric accessory is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random value update process in step S120. Specifically, random number for big hit determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for special symbol variation pattern, random number for hit determination, random number for normal symbol determination, update of random number for general pattern variation pattern determination Specifically, the processing of updating by adding +1 to each random value and the random number counter is performed. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, The initial random number value to be set is set as a new orbital initial value, and the random number value is updated.

  The main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process in step S130. Specifically, similar to step S30, a process for updating the big hit determination initial random number value, the special symbol determination initial random number value, the hit determination initial random number value, the normal symbol determination initial random number value is performed.

  The main CPU 110a performs an input control process in step S200. Specifically, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, the first starting opening detecting switch 45a, the second starting opening detecting switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the input control process will be described later.

  In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special map special power control process. Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the large winning port Processing such as opening and closing of the (first big winning opening 50, the second big winning opening 53) and setting the game state is performed. The details of the special figure special power control process will be described later.

  In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a general / universal / universal electric vehicle control process. Specifically, processing such as determination of acquired universal figure determination information based on passage of a game ball to the universal figure gate 44, variable display of normal symbols, opening / closing of the second starting opening 47 (auxiliary game), and the like are performed.

  In addition, the type of hit ordinary symbol and the type of lost ordinary symbol that are determined as the determination result of the universal symbol determination information performed in the universal symbol / general electric control processing are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game play is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, the selection ratio of each type of normal symbol, which is determined as the determination result of the universal pattern determination information performed in the universal pattern general electric power control process, the selection ratio of various lost normal symbols, does not change depending on the set value and becomes constant. ing. By doing so, the advantage degree of the player is not extremely changed by the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S450. Specifically, it determines whether or not various errors (improper winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, electric wave error, door opening error, etc. described later) have occurred, and produces an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred. Processing for transmission to the control board 130 is performed. As a result, the process for performing error notification by the effect control board 130 is executed.

  The main CPU 110a performs a payout control process in step S500. Specifically, various winning ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c are referred to, and various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second winning opening). Processing for transmitting a payout amount designation command corresponding to the special winning opening 53) to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes the process for paying out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

  The main CPU 110a performs a data creation process in step S600. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening / closing data output to the second start opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening. Special winning opening / closing data to be output to the mouth opening / closing solenoid 54b, first special symbol display device 60, special symbol display data to be output to the second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 62, 1 special symbol hold indicator 63, special symbol hold display data to be output to the second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold indicator 65, etc. are processed to create data.

  The main CPU 110a performs an output control process in step S700. Specifically, the port output processing for outputting signals such as the external output data created in step S600, the start opening / closing data, the special winning opening / closing data, special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, and special symbol hold display Data, a display output process for outputting a signal such as a normal symbol hold display data to various displays, a payout command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, A process of executing a production command transmission process of transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 or the production control board 130 is performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs a process at the time of calling the information program. Specifically, after prohibiting the interrupt, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

  In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) to be paid out by winning the game balls to various winning openings and the number of outs (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 5a. ) And the like are counted (collected). The details of the game ball counting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, processing for calculating the performance information of the gaming machine is performed from the number of payouts (the number of payout balls) and the number of outs (the number of outballs) counted (collected) in the game ball counting process. The details of the performance information calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the performance display data for displaying the performance information calculated by the performance information calculation processing on the information display 113 is set. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

  The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

  In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return process. Specifically, processing for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interrupts, and returning to the game program is performed.

  In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

  In this way, since the timer interruption is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and the number of outs are calculated, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

  Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S51 and step S52.

(Main control board input control processing)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the input control processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 43, and a prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. Perform processing.

  In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening detection switch input process. Specifically, whether a detection signal is input from the first big winning opening detection switch 50a or the second big winning opening detection switch 53a, that is, the game ball is put into the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53. It is determined whether or not the payout device 95 pays out the prize balls from the payout device 95.

  In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the first start opening detection switch 45a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start opening 45, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. And the process for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information. The details of the first starting opening detection switch input processing will be described later.

  In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second starting opening detection switch input process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the second start opening detection switch 47a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start opening 47, and the prize ball is paid out from the payout device 95. And the process for acquiring and storing the special figure determination information.

  The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure gate 44, and acquiring and storing the universal figure determination information. I do.

(Processing for inputting the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting opening detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first starting opening detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If the detection signal from the first starting opening detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 The starting port detection switch input process ends.

  In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating the three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the three prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination is performed. Acquire information (random number value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random value for special pattern variation pattern determination).

  In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first starting opening The detection switch input process ends.

  In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special figure reservation number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the first special figure reservation number. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the first image display device 70 displays the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special figure hold number (U1). Become.

  In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for a vacant storage unit from the first storage unit of the first special figure determination information storage area, and acquires the vacant storage unit obtained in step S230-3. The figure determination information is stored.

  In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the non-time saving game state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process is moved to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time saving game state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

  The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, the special symbol determination information acquired this time is pre-determined before the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the pre-determination (special feature A first starting opening winning award designation command for notifying the effect control board 130 of the (scheduled change pattern) is generated.

  In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting mouth winning designation command generated in step S230-9 in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

  As a result, the first start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start mouth prize designating command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start mouth prize specifying command makes the first start. Before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the mouth prize designating command is started, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect, icon change effect) that expects that the jackpot game is executed over one or more variable displays ) Can be performed.

  Since the same processing as the first starting opening detection switch input processing is performed for the second starting opening detection switch input processing, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the three prize ball counter, and the first special figure reservation number (U1), the first special figure determination information reservation storage area, the non-time saving game state, the first pre-determination process, the portion of the first starting mouth winning designation command, the second starting mouth detection switch 47a, two prize ball counter, It should be read as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure determination information reservation storage area, the time saving game state, the second preliminary determination process, and the second starting opening winning award designation command.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number (U2) is “4”, but it may be larger or smaller than this. Further, the upper limit value of the second special figure reservation number may be decreased as compared with the upper limit value of the first special figure reservation number. Further, the second pending storage itself may be eliminated by storing the special figure determination information only in the 0th storage section of the second special figure determination information storage area.

(Special control of special control of main control board)
The special figure special power control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special figure special power control process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric power process data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric power process data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address. This special figure special electric power control processing ends.

  Specifically, if the special symbol special power processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination process (step S310) for starting the variable display of the special symbols is executed based on the pending storage, and the special symbol special power processing data = If 1, the special symbol variation process (step S320) for stopping and displaying the special symbol by the passage of the variation time is executed, and if the special symbol special electricity processing data = 2, the passage of the stop time and the stopped special symbol Depending on the type, the special symbol stop process (step S330) for shifting the process to the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, and if the special map special electric power process data = 3, the big hit game for executing the big hit game The processing (step S340) is executed, and if the special figure special electricity processing data = 4, the jackpot game ending processing (step S350) for ending the jackpot game is executed, If Figure electrically movable device control processing data = 5, executes a small hit game processing for executing small prize game (step S360). The details of each process will be described later.

  This "special figure special electric power processing data" is set as necessary in each sub routine of the special electric figure special electric power control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. .

(Special symbol memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbols are being variably displayed. If the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is ended. If the special symbols are not being displayed in a varying manner, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. Transfer.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the second special figure reservation number (U2) to update it, and in step S310-6, corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after subtraction. The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

  The main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-7, and in the second special figure determination information storage area in step S310-8. The stored data is shifted to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the third storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the second special figure determination information holding storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section which is the special figure determination information execution storage area and stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game that has been performed is deleted.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1. Transfer.

  The main CPU 110a subtracts "1" from the first special figure reservation number (U1) to update it in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the special special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the subtracted first special figure reservation number (U1). The symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

  In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol hold storage area. The specified data determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, and stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game is deleted.

  With the shift process of the special figure determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special figure reservation number (U1) and the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction is displayed in the main RAM 110c. Set to a predetermined area of. Thereby, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 will be updated.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information holding storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information holding storage area to shift (the second special figure holding number 1 priority map reservation number is prioritized to be subtracted), but in the order in which the game ball entered the starting opening, the first special map determination information reserve storage area or the second special map determination information reserve storage area You may shift (the number of 1st special figure reservation and the number of 2nd special figure reservation are subtracted in the winning order), or the first special figure determination information holding storage area is given priority over the second special figure determination information holding storage area. May be shifted (the first special figure reservation number is subtracted in preference to the second special figure reservation number).

  In step S311, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is a jackpot and the stop special figure data of the special symbol based on the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit which is the special figure determination information execution storage area. The jackpot determination process is executed. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

  In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designating command corresponding to the special symbol type determined in the jackpot determination process in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the effect symbol 70a that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable effect is performed.

  In step S313, the main CPU 110a determines the special pattern variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit that is the special symbol determination information execution storage area. I do. The details of the special figure variation pattern determination processing will be described later.

  In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure fluctuation pattern designating command corresponding to the type of special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Thereby, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the fluctuation effect pattern which is the effect mode of the fluctuation effect performed during the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol corresponding to the type of the special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , Start the variable display of special symbols. Thereby, the lighting data of the LED for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creating process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800. The variable display of the special symbol will be performed on the special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

  In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets "1" to the special symbol special electric power process data, and ends the special symbol memory determination process this time. To do.

  In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state flag indicating the customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, this special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the condition that the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not executed is included in the requirement. May be.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is produced in the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area, and finish the special symbol storage determination process this time. As a result, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the customer waiting effect for prompting the player to play the game is performed.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a big hit determination process in the main control board 110.

  In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting values (here, 1 to 4) stored in the setting value (during game) area of the game RWM area, and in step S311-2, refer to FIG. Select the jackpot determination table shown. Specifically, if the special figure determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is shifted from the first special figure determination information holding storage area, FIG. ) Selected the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, if the one shifted from the second special symbol determination information holding storage area, jackpot for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10 (b) Select the judgment table.

  In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a collates the current probability game state and the random number for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S311-4. If the jackpot is not won, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

  In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the winning state data (any one of 00H to 02H) corresponding to the current game state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, FIG. The special symbol determination table for jackpot shown in) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S311-9.

  In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a collates the current probability game state and the random number for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not the jackpot is won. If the small hit is won, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If the small hit is not won, the process proceeds to step S311-8.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 11C, and shifts the processing to step S311-9.

  In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for loss shown in FIG. 11B, and shifts the processing to step S311-9.

  In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a collates the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), special symbol determination random number value for which special jackpot determination (lottery) is to be performed, with the special symbol determination table. Then, the special symbol which is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display executed by the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 is determined.

  In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a sets the stop special figure data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this big hit determination process.

(Special control fluctuation pattern determination process of main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination processing in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the non-time saving game state. If it is in the non-time saving game state, the process is moved to step S313-2. If it is not in the non-time saving game state, the process is moved to step S313-3.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving game state shown in FIG. 12, and shifts the processing to step S311-4.

  In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the special figure variation pattern determination table for the time saving game state shown in FIG. 13, and shifts the processing to step S310-7-4.

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a collates the determination result of the big hit determination, the type of the special symbol, the random number value for the reach determination and the random number value for the special figure variation pattern with the special figure variation pattern determination table to change the special figure. Determine the pattern.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, the special figure variation corresponding to the determined variation pattern. The pattern designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the current special figure variation pattern determination processing is ended. As a result, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for determining the fluctuation effect pattern that is the effect mode of the fluctuation effect is performed.

(Special symbol fluctuation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S315 has elapsed. If the variable time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2 to stop the variable display of the special symbol, and if the variable time has not elapsed, in order to continue the variable display of the special symbol, This special symbol variation process is ended.

  In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a sets data for stopping and displaying the special symbol corresponding to the stop special figure data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 110c to stop and display the special symbol. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and the player is notified of the jackpot determination result.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets the symbol determination command corresponding to the stop special figure data set in the main RAM 110c in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for stopping and displaying the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a sets the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-5, sets "2" to the special figure special power processing data. The special symbol variation process of this time is set.

(Special control stop processing of the main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320-4 has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process moves to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process ends in order to continue the stop display of the special symbol.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a performs a time saving game end determination process. Specifically, when the time saving game flag indicating that it is in the time saving game state is set in the main RAM 110c, the time saving time (J) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1, and the time saving time is "0". If it is, the processing is ended after shifting to the non-time saving game state by clearing the time saving game flag.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game end determination process. Specifically, when the high-probability game flag indicating the high-probability game state is set in the main RAM 110c, the high-probability number (X) stored in the main RAM 110c is subtracted by 1, and the high-probability number is increased. When (X) is "0", the process is ended after shifting to the low-probability game state by clearing the high-probability game flag.

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the game state designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for updating the game state grasped by the effect control board 130 or updating the effect mode is performed.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-6, and if it is not a big hit special symbol, the process is moved to step S330-9.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets "3" in the special figure special electric power processing data and prepares to move the processing to the jackpot game processing, and in step S330-7, the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 110c. , High probability game flag, time saving number (J) and high probability number (X) are cleared to shift to a low probability non-time saving game state.

  The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start preparation setting process in step S330-8. Specifically, the type of jackpot game corresponding to the stop special figure data is determined from the jackpot opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 15, and the control data corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is specified.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol stopped and displayed is a small hit special symbol. If it is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-10, and if it is not a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a sets "5" in the special figure special electric power process data and prepares to move the process to the small hitting game process, and in step S330-11, executes the small hitting start preparation setting process. Specifically, the control data for the small hit game is specified.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command according to the type of the big hit game or the small hit game in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S330-13, sets the big hit game or the small hit game type. The corresponding opening time is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is ended. Thereby, the opening designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the opening effect of the jackpot game is performed.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric power process data and prepares to move the process to the special symbol storage determination process, and ends the special symbol stop process of this time.

(Main control board jackpot game processing)
With reference to FIG. 34, the jackpot game process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a big hit game process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is "0". If it is currently being opened, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is not currently being opened, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-10 has elapsed. It is determined that the opening time has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process moves to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process of this time is ended.

  The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot start setting process in step S340-3. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stored. Here, since no round game has been played yet, the number of round games (R) becomes "1".

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening opening process. Specifically, the number of releases (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is updated by adding "1". Further, in order to open the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening / closing member 54, energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b is set. At the same time, the opening time of the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current round game number (R) and opening number (K).

  The main CPU 110a performs a round designation command transmission determination process in step S340-5. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and when K = 1, a round designation command corresponding to the number of round games (R) is set in the production transmission data storage area. Thereby, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process for executing the round game effect according to the number of rounds is performed.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means a process after finishing all preset round games. Therefore, if the ending is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-18, and if the ending is not currently performed, the process proceeds to step S340-7.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special winning opening is being closed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b is set. As a result, if it is determined that the special winning opening is closed, the process proceeds to step S340-8, and if it is determined that the special winning opening is not closed, the process proceeds to step S340-9.

  In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the special winning opening set in step S340-10 described later has elapsed. If the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game processing of this time is ended to maintain the closing of the special winning opening, and if the closing time has elapsed, the big winning opening is opened to step S340-4. Transfer processing.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, whether or not the number of large winning opening balls (C), which is the number of game balls entering the large winning opening, has reached a prescribed number (9), or once in the number of times of opening (K). It is determined whether or not the per-opening time has passed. If the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-10, and if the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the current jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a performs a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, energization data for energizing the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b or the second big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 54b in order to close the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 or the second big winning opening opening / closing member 54. Is cleared, and the closing time of the first special winning opening 50 or the second special winning opening 53 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the current number of round games (R) and the number of open games (K).

  In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not one round game has ended. When one round game is over, the process moves to step S340-12, and when one round game isn't over, this big hit game process is over.

  The main CPU 110a performs a round data initialization process in step S340-12. Specifically, the number of times of opening (K) stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared and the number of large winning opening balls (C) is cleared. However, the number of round games (R) is not cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c is the maximum value. If the number of round games (R) is the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-15. If the number of round games (R) is not the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a adds “1” to the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c and stores the result, and ends the jackpot game process this time.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a clears the number of round games (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, in step S340-16, sets an ending designating command in the production transmission data storage area, and in step S340-. In 17, the ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the jackpot game process this time is ended. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time set in step S340-17 has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-19, the special figure special electric power processing data is set to "4" to prepare for the jackpot game end processing, and if the ending time has not elapsed, this time The jackpot game processing of is ended.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

  In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a loads the stop special figure data and the winning state data stored in the main RAM 110c.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a refers to the gaming state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing as to whether or not to set the high probability flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, if the stop special figure data is "02", the high probability flag is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and sets the high probability count (X) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. To do. For example, if the stop special map data is "02", the high probability number (X) is set to 50,000 times.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 and performs processing as to whether or not to set the time saving game flag based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", if the winning state data is 00H, the time saving game flag is not set, but if the winning state data is 01H or 02H, the time saving game flag is set.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16, and sets the number of times saved (J) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c based on the stop special figure data and the winning state data. . For example, when the stop special figure data is "01", if the winning state data is 00H, the number of time saving (J) is set to 0 times, and if the winning state data is 01H or 02H, the number of time saving is (J). As 100 times.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designating command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the high probability flag and the time saving game flag in the production transmission data storage area, and in step S350-7, the special figure special power processing. The data is set to 0 and preparations are made for moving to special symbol memory determination processing, and the jackpot game ending processing this time is ended.

(Main control board abnormality determination process)
The abnormality determination processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S451, the main CPU 110a performs an incorrect winning error determination process. Specifically, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 47 when not in the auxiliary game, and when the game ball is won in the big winning port when not in the special game (big hit game, small hit game) Then, an illegal winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c on the assumption that an illegal winning error has occurred. As a result, the illegal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing the illegal winning error notification (displaying the illegal winning error image on the image display devices 70 and 71, outputting the illegal winning error sound). Will be done.

  In step S452, the main CPU 110a performs an abnormal winning error determination process. Specifically, the number of game balls and the winning balls won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) When the number of game balls discharged from the prize-winning ball flow path to be made to flow down does not match, an abnormal prize-winning error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c, assuming that an abnormal prize-winning error has occurred. As a result, an abnormal winning error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing abnormal winning error notification (displaying an abnormal winning error image on the image display devices 70, 71, outputting an abnormal winning error sound). Will be done.

  The main CPU 110a performs magnetic error determination processing in step S453. Specifically, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 55a for a predetermined period, it is determined that a magnetic error has occurred and a magnetic error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a magnetic error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing magnetic error notification (display of a magnetic error image on the image display devices 70 and 71, output of a magnetic error sound) is performed. become.

  The main CPU 110a performs a radio wave error determination process in step S454. Specifically, when an abnormal radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 56a for a predetermined period, a radio wave error designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c as a radio wave error has occurred. As a result, a radio wave error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for executing radio wave error notification (display of a radio wave error image on the image display devices 70 and 71, output of a radio wave error sound) is performed. become.

  The main CPU 110a performs a door opening error determination process in step S455. Specifically, when the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that a door open error has occurred, and a door open error start designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c, and the open detection switch 31a is turned off. When the state is reached, it is assumed that the door opening error has been canceled, and the door opening error end designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the door opening error start designation command and the door opening error end designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the door opening error notification (display of the door opening error image on the image display devices 70, 71, door opening error sound). Output) will be performed.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not various errors (abnormalities) have occurred while the game progress control is being performed (after completion of the initial setting process of step S10 described above), and the error has occurred. In this case, the processing for causing the error notification is performed, so that the security of the gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

(Game ball counting process of main control board)
The game ball counting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the game ball counting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

  First, the main CPU 110a saves the game stack pointer in the information RWM area in step S811, sets the information stack pointer in step S812, and saves the register in the information RWM area in step S813.

  In step S814, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal game state. If it is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step S815 to count the number of normal medium payouts which is the number of payouts in the normal game state. If it is not in the normal game state, the number of normal medium payouts is not counted. As a matter, the processing is moved to step S823.

  In step S815, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball is not won in the general winning opening 43, the process is moved to step S817, and if the detection signal is input, the game ball is in the general winning opening 43. In step S816, the payout amount (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the general winning opening 43 is added to the normal medium payout number counter for counting the normal medium payout number. The normal medium payout number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S817, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 50a or the second special winning opening detection switch 53a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not won in the special winning opening, and the process proceeds to step S819. If the detection signal is input, the game ball is entered in the special winning opening. As a result, in step S818, "15" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the special winning opening is added to the normal medium payout number counter.

  The number of payouts (the number of prize balls) when the game balls win the first special winning opening 50 is set to 15, and the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) when the game balls win the second special winning opening 53. The number of payouts corresponding to each special winning opening may be different, such as ten. In this case, when the detection signal is input from the first special winning opening detection switch 50a, the normal medium payout number counter is set to "15" which is the payout amount (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the first special winning opening 50. When the detection signal is input from the second special winning opening detection switch 53a, the normal medium payout number counter is incremented by "10" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the second special winning opening 53. Good.

  In step S819, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first starting opening detection switch 45a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not won in the first starting opening 45, the process proceeds to step S821, and if the detection signal is input, the first starting opening 45 is set. Assuming that the game ball has won, in step S820, "3" which is the payout amount (prize number) corresponding to the first starting opening 45 is added to the normal medium payout amount counter.

  In step S821, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the second start opening detection switch 47a. If the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the game ball has not won in the second starting port 47, the process proceeds to step S823, and if the detection signal is input, the second starting port 47 is set. Assuming that the game ball has won, in step S822, “2” which is the payout amount (prize number) corresponding to the second starting opening 47 is added to the normal medium payout amount counter.

  In step S823, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the out-ball detection switch 57a. When the detection signal is not input, it is assumed that there is no out ball which is the game ball discharged from the game area 5a, the current game ball counting process is terminated, and when the detection signal is input, Assuming that there is an out ball, in step S824, "1" is added to the total out number counter for counting the out ball (total out number) in all gaming states. The total out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S825, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal game state, the current game ball counting process is ended, and if it is in the normal game state, in step S826, the number of outs in the normal game state (number of outs in the normal state) is counted. "1" is added to the normal medium out number counter, and the current game ball counting process is ended. The normal medium out number counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In this way, before the progress control of the game is performed (the initial setting process of step S10 described above), the progress control of the game is performed without counting and storing the number of payouts and the number of outs (as described above). Since the normal medium payout number, the normal medium out number, and the total out number, which are the game information (history information) in (after the initialization processing of step S10 is completed), are counted and stored, the player can execute the game. It is possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) of the gaming machine at that time, which can be useful for calculating performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine.

  In addition, even when a game ball is won in the big prize hole by the small hit game during the normal game state, "15" which is the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the large prize hole is added to the normal medium payout counter. However, when the game ball is won in the big winning hole by the small hit game during the normal game state, the payout amount may not be added to the normal medium payout amount counter.

(Main control board performance information calculation process)
The performance information calculation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the performance information calculation processing (information program) in the main control board 110.

  In the present embodiment, the state in which the power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 is divided into a plurality of gaming sections, and performance information for grasping (evaluating) the actual performance of the gaming machine is displayed. Therefore, first, the game section will be described.

  The game section is divided by the total number of outs, and the total number of outs counted from the first power-on or the 0 clear (initialization) of the information RWM area due to a data error becomes 300. Up to the first game section, after the first game section, the game section is switched every 60,000 total out number, the second game section, the third game section, the fourth game section ... It becomes N game section.

  First, in step S831, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the section counter for counting the number of the game section is the first game section value (0) indicating the first game section. To do. If it is the first game section value, the process is moved to step S832 assuming that the present is the first game section which is not the target of performance information calculation. If it is not the first game section value, the current performance information is set. The process proceeds to step S833, assuming that it is a game section after the second game section that is the calculation target of. The section counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S832, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or larger than the first section update value (300). If it is equal to or more than the first section update value, the game section is updated, and the process proceeds to step S838. If it is not equal to or more than the first section update value, the game section is not updated and the performance information of this time The calculation process ends.

  In step S833, the main CPU 110a determines the normal base as performance information from the normal medium payout number in the current game section indicated by the normal medium payout number counter and the normal medium out number in the current game section indicated by the normal medium out number counter. A value is calculated and the first decimal place is rounded off, and in step S834, the rounded normal base value is saved in the first area of the base storage area set in the information RWM area.

  The “normal base value” is a value of the game value used for the game during the normal game state (the number of outs that are the number of game balls that have been shot in the game area or discharged from the game area) during the normal game state. It is the ratio (ratio) of the game value amount (the number of payouts, which is the number of game balls to be paid out to the player), which is given in the game, and is "(the number of payouts in the normal game state, which is usually The number of medium payouts / the number of normal medium outs which is the number of outs in the normal gaming state) × 100 ”.

  The "base storage area" is a storage area for storing the normal base values in the four game sections, the first area for storing the normal base value in the current game section, and the previous one. A second area for storing the normal base value in the game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before And the fourth area of the.

  In step S835, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the total number of outs in the current game section indicated by the total out number counter is equal to or greater than the second section update value (60,000). If it is equal to or more than the second section update value, the game section is updated and the process proceeds to step S836. If it is not equal to or more than the second section update value, the game section is not updated and the performance information of this time The calculation process ends.

  It should be noted that the total number of outs is 60,000, which divides the game section after the second game section. The number of 60,000 pieces is about one day in a gaming machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute. It is a number that can guarantee the operating amount of. Therefore, the game section is updated when the gaming machine is operated for about one day.

  In step S836, the main CPU 110a shifts down the contents of the first to third areas of the base storage area by one, and in step S837, clears the first area of the base storage area to zero. As a result, the normal base value stored in each area is stored as the normal base value in the previous game section, the normal base value in the current game section is reset, and preparations are made for shifting to the next game section. Be seen.

  In step S838, the main CPU 110a updates the game section by adding “1” to the section counter, and in step S839, the total out number indicated by the total out number counter and the normal medium payout indicated by the normal medium payout number counter. The number and the number of normal medium outs indicated by the number of normal medium outs are cleared to 0, a process of shifting to the next game section is performed, and the performance information calculation process of this time is ended.

  In this way, by updating the game section according to the total number of outs, it is allowed that there is a state in which different setting values are set in one game section. Therefore, it is possible to obtain (store) game information (history information such as the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, the number of regular outs, etc.) over a plurality of set values in one game section, and the change in the settings is disturbed. It is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value) without any need.

  In addition, a normal base value (a type of history information) is calculated and stored from the number of regular outs and the number of regular outs for each gaming section as performance information for each gaming section. It becomes possible to provide information for appropriately grasping (evaluating) the actual performance.

  Also, for the total number of outs, the number of ordinary medium payouts, and the number of ordinary medium outs, even if the setting value is changed, the game information is unaffected (unrelated to the setting value), so the setting value It is possible to calculate, store, and display the performance information (normal base value) excluding the influence of, and it is possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, in the first game section, the normal base value is not calculated, so that the operation confirmation in the pre-shipment inspection of the game machine (the operation check of the various winning hole detection switches and the out-ball detection switch by the launch and maintenance of the game balls) It becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience of misleading the actual performance of the gaming machine, because information having low credibility affected by the above) is not provided.

  In addition, by calculating the normal base value after the second gaming section, it is possible to display a highly reliable normal base value that excludes the influence of the pre-shipment inspection of the gaming machine, and to improve the actual performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to provide highly credible information for accurately grasping.

  Although the normal base value is calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area every time the performance information calculation process is executed (every 4 milliseconds), the normal base value in the current game section is calculated. The normal base value in the current game section may be calculated and saved in the first area of the base storage area every time when is displayed on the information display 113 (every 20 seconds).

  Further, in the first game section, although the normal base value is not calculated, the number of ordinary medium payouts and the number of ordinary medium outs are counted, but the number of ordinary medium payouts and the number of ordinary medium outs are not counted. You may

(Main control board performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process (information program) in the main control board 110.

  First, in step S851, the main CPU 110a determines whether the display switching time counter for determining whether to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is the display switching value (0). If it is a display switching value, the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is assumed to be switched, and the process proceeds to step S852. If it is not a display switching value, it is displayed on the information display 113. The processing moves to step S856 assuming that the performance information to be switched is not switched. It should be noted that when this processing is first executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the value of the display switching time counter is “0” which is the display switching value. The display switching time counter is set in the information RWM area.

  In step S852, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the operation confirmed flag for determining whether or not the operation confirmation display of the information display device 113 has been completed in the information RWM area is saved. If the operation-confirmed flag is saved, the process proceeds to step S854 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the operation-confirmed flag is not saved, the information display 113 is displayed. Then, the processing shifts to step S853 for performing the operation confirmation display. It should be noted that, when this processing is first executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the operation confirmed flag is in a state not saved.

  The “operation confirmation display” is a display for confirming the operation of the information display 113. Specifically, all the segments (including the decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) forming the information display 113 are fully illuminated for 0.3 seconds and fully illuminated for 0.3 seconds. It is a blinking display of a cycle of 0.6 seconds that is repeatedly turned off and on, and this blinking display is continuously displayed for 5 seconds.

  In step 853, the main CPU 110a determines the display data for the operation confirmation display of the information display 113, and shifts the processing to step S856.

  In step S854, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is “0”, the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is “1”, the base storage value is stored. If the normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired and the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data selection is performed. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired. The data selection counter value will be updated in step S862 described later.

  In step S855, the main CPU 110a refers to a display data determination table (not shown), and based on the section counter value, the normal medium out number indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value, the information display 113. The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on is determined, and the process proceeds to step S856.

  In step S856, the main CPU 110a sets the determined display data as the display information of the information display unit 113 in the output data area of the information RWM area. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control processing (information program) in step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed. It will be displayed on the display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

  The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-described display switching time counter in step S857, and determines in step S858 whether the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time for switching the display of the information display unit 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S865. If it is larger than the upper limit value, it is displayed on the information display unit 113. Assuming that the performance information switching time has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialization) in step S859.

  In step S860, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there is the above-described operation confirmed flag in the information RWM area. If there is an operation confirmed flag, the process proceeds to step S862. If there is no operation confirmed flag, the operation confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area in step S861 and the process proceeds to step S865. .

  The main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-described data selection counter in step S862, and determines in step S863 whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S865. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared to 0 (initialization) in step S864, and the process proceeds to step S865.

  In step S865, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area in step S813, and restores the game stack pointer saved in the information RWM area in step S811 in step S866. The display data setting process ends.

  As described above, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 blink (the operation confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information display 113 has a failure, and if so, which segment has a failure. It is also possible to confirm the operation of the segment that is not used when changing the set value (segment that does not display the set value).

  Also, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 Performance information (normal base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and to grasp the possibility that fraudulent acts were performed.

  As described above, in the main CPU 110a of this embodiment, the presence / absence of a signal input from the setting key switch 112a is monitored only in the initial setting process. That is, even if the setting key is operated and the setting key switch 112a is turned on after the game progress control is started, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not entered. Therefore, even if the setting key is illegally operated during the normal game and the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the setting value is not displayed on the information display 113, and the information (setting) that the gaming shop side wants to keep secret (setting) Value) will not be leaked, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

  If the setting key switch 112a is turned on after the game progress control is started, it may be determined that an error has occurred and an error notification may be given. By doing so, even if the setting key is operated illegitimately and the setting key switch 112a is turned on, the error notification is given, so that the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Display information on the information display in each game section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described. In the display information table of FIG. 40, the section counter value (type of game section), the normal out number, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

  The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 is “bL.”, Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and “bL.” Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "b2." that indicates the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3." that indicates the normal base value of the game section three times before.

  The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 is “−−” indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is “0”, or the normal out number is “0”. "00" indicating that the normal out number is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", respectively, and the normal base value is There is "99." which indicates "100" or more. If the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and is displayed in two digits.

  And, regarding the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment, the display mode does not change (lit and displayed) regardless of the gaming section and the number of outs during the normal operation, but regarding the identification information displayed in the identification segment, the gaming section and The display mode is changed (blinking display or lit display) depending on the number of normal medium outs and the like (presence or absence of the calculated normal base value and presence / absence of credibility of the calculated normal base value).

  Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when displaying the identification information of the game section for which the calculated normal base value does not exist, the identification information is displayed in a blinking manner. Further, in the gaming section after the second gaming section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current gaming section is displayed, a period in which the calculated normal base value has low credibility (the number of regular outs is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed in blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit up and displayed.

  Here, as an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is “1”, the number of normal medium outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is “0”. When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is “35”, “bL.” Is displayed in blinking on the identification segment of the information display 113 and “35” is displayed on the numerical segment. Will be lit up.

  As described above, when the normal base value is “99” or less, the performance information that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of “00” to “99” is displayed in the numerical segment while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is 100 or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display of “99.” is displayed in the numerical segment, so that it is easy to understand that it is an abnormal normal base value. .

  When the normal base value is less than “10”, “0” is always displayed in the tens place of the numerical value segment and is displayed in two digits (for example, “01”). It is possible to make effective display by effectively using the seven 7-segment displays.

  In the case where the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999 which has not reached a sufficient number for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information “bL.” Displayed in the identification segment blinks, it becomes easy to understand that the normal base value currently displayed is information with low credibility.

  In addition, when there is no calculated normal base value, "---" which is not a numerical value is displayed in the numerical value segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It's easier to figure out what's not.

  Note that the game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as the information program, but any one or two of them are executed as the game program (for example, the game ball counting process). The processing may be executed in the input control processing that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

  Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed not in the information program but in the output control process which is the game program.

  In addition, by the out-ball detection switch 57a, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the game ball winning the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 53, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out sphere consisting of the game sphere that has flowed in, the out sphere detection switch 57a may detect only the game sphere that has flowed into the out port 39. In that case, the out ball detection switch 57a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first big winning opening detection switch 50a, the second big winning opening detection switch. The number of outs (total number of outs, number of medium outs) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected at 53a.

(Display example of information display)
Next, display examples 1 to 7 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Display example 1 of information display)
A display example 1 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a display example when the setting is changed when the power is turned on for the first time.

  First, when the power is turned on (power is turned on) for the first time, the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the setting change operation is not performed, a non-recoverable error occurs due to a checksum error, and error information “E” indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the power is turned off. The error information will continue to be displayed until.

  On the other hand, when the setting change operation is being performed, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the provisional set value “1” is displayed on the information display 113, and the information display is displayed every time the set value update operation is performed. The setting value displayed in 113 is updated to “1” → “2” → “3”. When the set value confirmation operation is performed in that state, the set value "3" displayed on the information display 113 immediately before is confirmed and saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM, and the information display 113 is displayed. The setting value "3" displayed in is erased and the setting change mode ends.

  After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the operation confirmation display of the information display 113 is started and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) blink, and this state continues for 5 seconds. To do.

  As described above, when the set value is displayed on the information display 113, the set value is displayed because the value is displayed on the numerical value segment of the information display 113 as in the case of displaying the numerical value of the normal base value. Can be easily recognized.

  Also, when displaying a set value consisting of a 1-digit numerical value, unlike the case of displaying the value of the normal base value, it is displayed without adding "0" to the tens digit, so It becomes difficult to be confused, and it becomes possible to easily recognize that the set value is displayed.

  In addition, when the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on for the first time (the setting value is not saved), the error information “E” of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display unit 113. It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the value has to be set.

  Further, since the operation confirmation display is performed before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, it is confirmed whether or not the information display 113 is out of order, and if it is out, which segment is out of order It becomes possible to confirm whether or not it is. It is also possible to confirm the operation of the segment that is not used when changing the set value (segment that does not display the set value).

  In the case of displaying the set value, the value is not displayed on the 7-segment display 113d indicating the ones digit of the numerical value segment, but is displayed on any one of the other 7-segment displays 113a to 113c of the information display 113. The set value may be displayed, or the set value may be displayed on two or more 7-segment displays of the information display 113.

  Further, when the set value is displayed, identification information (for example, “St.”) indicating the set value may be displayed in the identification segment and the set value may be displayed in the numerical segment. In that case, the set value may be displayed in the ones place of the numerical value segment, or the set value may be displayed in the tens place.

  Further, instead of displaying the set value only on the information display 113, a special symbol display or a normal symbol display which can be visually recognized from the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1 is configured by a 7-segment display, The set value may be displayed on either one of the special symbol display device and the normal symbol display device.

  Further, when the non-recoverable error occurs, "E" is displayed as the error information indicating the non-recoverable error on the information display 113, but the error information indicating the non-recoverable error is not limited to "E". It may be any display as long as it can be recognized that an error has occurred. For example, a display such as "Err" or "E." may be displayed.

(Display example 2 of information display)
The display example 2 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a display example when the RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

  First, when the power is turned on (power is supplied), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the progress control of the game is performed. At this time, if the RWM clear operation is performed, the RWM clear process is executed, but even if the RWM clear operation is performed, the set value saved in the set value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range. If it is not (1 to 4 in this case), a non-recoverable error occurs due to an abnormal set value, error information "E" indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the power is turned off. The error information continues to be displayed.

  Then, when the RWM clear process is being performed, the information display 113 is in a state in which nothing is displayed.

  After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the operation check of the information display 113 is started, all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) blink, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

  As described above, during the RWM clearing process when the set value is normal, no information (for example, the set value or performance information) is displayed on the information display 113, and thus an illegal act such as performing the RWM clearing process is performed. Even if this happens, the information that the game store side wants to keep secret will not be leaked, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Further, when the set value is abnormal, the error information of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the set value should be set.

  Further, since the operation confirmation display is performed before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, it is confirmed whether or not the information display 113 is out of order, and if it is out, which segment is out of order It becomes possible to confirm whether or not it is. It is also possible to confirm the operation of the segment that is not used when changing the set value (segment that does not display the set value).

(Information display example 3)
A display example 3 of the information display device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a display example when setting confirmation is performed when the power is turned on (power is turned on again).

  First, when the power is turned on (power is turned on again), the main control board 110 is in the initial control, which is a stage before the game progress control is performed. At this time, if the setting confirmation operation is performed, the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, but if the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is not within the proper range (1 to 4). A non-recoverable error occurs due to an abnormal set value, error information "E" indicating the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, and the error information is continuously displayed until the power is turned off.

  On the other hand, when the setting value saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area is within the proper range (1 to 4), the current setting value (here, “1”) is displayed on the information display 113. When the confirmation end operation is performed, the setting value “1” displayed on the information display 113 is erased and the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After that, when the initial setting process is completed, the timer interrupt process is started and the game progress control is performed and the normal control is performed. At this time, the operation check of the information display 113 is started, all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) blink, and this state continues for 5 seconds. .

  In this way, when the set value is abnormal, the error information “E” of the non-recoverable error is displayed on the information display 113, so that it is easy to recognize that the set value must be set. It will be possible.

  Further, since the operation confirmation display is performed before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, it is confirmed whether or not the information display 113 is out of order, and if it is out, which segment is out of order It becomes possible to confirm whether or not it is. It is also possible to confirm the operation of the segment that is not used when changing the set value (segment that does not display the set value).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the setting change or the setting confirmation is performed, the operation confirmation display is performed after the setting value is displayed on the information display 113, while the setting change or the setting confirmation is performed. If there is not, the operation display is performed without displaying the set value on the information display 113. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the operation of the information display 113, whether or not the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. Also, when changing or confirming the settings, if the operation confirmation display is performed before the set values are displayed, the amusement shop staff who changes or confirms the settings will be confused. The display makes it easier to understand the setting change and the setting confirmation.

(Display example 4 of information display)
A display example 4 of the information display device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a display example when the first game section is started by shifting to the game progress control.

  When the progress control of the game is started and becomes the normal control, the operation confirmation display of the information display 113 is started, and all the segments (including the decimal point DP) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) blink. However, this state continues for 5 seconds.

  After that, when the operation confirmation display ends, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113. Specifically, the first segment identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section is displayed in blinking on the identification segment, and "---" indicating that the calculated normal base value does not exist in the numerical segment. Is lit up.

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the second identification information “b1.” Indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” Indicating that it is the game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b3.” Indicating that it is the game section three times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the first game section is 300 and the first game section ends, the display of the normal base value in the current game section to the game section three times before is displayed. Each time 5 seconds, which is the switching time, elapses, the switching is sequentially performed.

  As described above, before displaying the normal base value in each game section in order, the operation of the information display 113 is checked for a predetermined period (5 seconds), so whether each segment of the information display 113 is out of order or not. Whether or not it is possible to confirm whether or not the normal base value is displayed thereafter can be avoided.

  Further, since the time for confirming the operation is the same as the time for displaying the normal base value in each game section, it is possible to easily recognize the idling period before displaying the normal base value.

  Also, since there is no normal base value to be calculated in the first game section, the normal base value is not displayed, so compared to the case of displaying a low-credibility normal base value thereafter (after the second game section) It is possible to improve the reliability with respect to the displayed normal base value.

  Further, regarding the display of a plurality of game sections without the calculated normal base value, "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value is commonly displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113. , It is possible to easily recognize that there is no calculated normal base value.

(Display example 5 of information display)
A display example 5 of the information display device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display example when the first game section is switched to the second game section.

  First, in the first game section, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” Indicating that it is the game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, when the total number of outs in the first game section reaches 300 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the first game section ends and the second game section starts, but the display switching time Until a certain 5 seconds elapse, the display of the normal base value until then continues.

  Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b3.” Indicating that it is the game section three times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display mode. Specifically, the first segment identification information “bL.” Indicating the current game section is blinked and displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value “23” is illuminated and displayed on the numerical segment. It

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section is displayed on the information display 113 in a blinking display manner. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the second identification information “b1.” Indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” Indicating that it is the game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section becomes 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is 5 seconds which is the display switching time. It will switch in order as time passes.

  Thus, even if the game section is switched while the normal base value of the predetermined game section is being displayed, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. The display of the normal base value does not end halfway due to the switching of the game section, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the normal base value.

  Also, even if the game section is switched, instead of starting from the display of the normal base value of the current game section, the display order up to that point is taken over (for example, the normal base of the game section two times before). When the game section is switched during the display of the value, the normal base value displayed next becomes the normal base value of the game section three times before), so that the normal base value of each game section is changed by switching the game section. The display order does not suddenly change, and it becomes possible to easily recognize the normal base value of each game section.

(Display example 6 of information display)
A display example 6 of the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display example when the display mode of the normal base value of the current game section is switched during the second game section.

  First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the first segment identification information “bL.” Indicating the current game section is blinked on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value “36” is illuminated on the numerical segment. It

  After that, when the total number of outs in the second game section becomes 6000 or more before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, it becomes possible to calculate a highly reliable normal base value, and display the normal base value. Although the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the normal base value is normally displayed in the blinking display mode until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the second identification information “b1.” Indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (in this case, before the occurrence of the game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” Indicating that it is the game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before (in this case, before the game section occurs) is displayed in a blinking display mode on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the fourth identification information "b3." Indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is lit up and displayed with the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section, and the numerical segment is lit up with the calculated normal base value "36". It

  After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the second game section is 60,000 and the third game section is reached, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is switched. Each time 5 seconds, which is the time, elapses, it is switched in order.

  In this way, when it becomes possible to display a credible normal base value, the display mode of the target normal base value (display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment) is switched. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize whether the normal base value has credibility or the normal base value does not have credibility.

  Further, while the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the blinking display mode is continued until the display switching time elapses. Therefore, the same normal base value is not displayed in a plurality of display modes during the display switching time, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to recognize the normal base value.

(Display example 7 of information display)
A display example 7 of the information display unit 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a display example when the second game section is switched to the third game section.

  First, in the second game section, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is lit up and displayed with the first identification information "bL." Indicating that it is the current game section, and the numerical segment is lit up with the calculated normal base value "36". It

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the second identification information “b1.” Indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Then, when the total number of outs in the second game section reaches 60000 before the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the second game section ends and the third game section starts and the normal base in each game section. Although the condition for switching the display of the value is satisfied, the display of the normal base value until then is continued until the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses.

  Furthermore, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section two times before (here, the first game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, in the identification segment, the third identification information “b2.” Indicating that it is the game section two times before is displayed in blinking, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  After that, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the game section three times before is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the identification segment is blinked with the fourth identification information "b3." Indicating that it is the game section three times before, and the numerical segment indicates that there is no calculated normal base value. "-" Is lit up and displayed.

  Then, when the display switching time of 5 seconds has elapsed, the normal base value in the current game section (here, the third game section) is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display 113. Specifically, the first identification information “bL.” Indicating the current game section is blinked and displayed on the identification segment, and the calculated normal base value “08” is lit and displayed on the numerical segment. It

  Further, when the display switching time of 5 seconds elapses, the normal base value in the previous game section (here, the second game section) is displayed on the information display 113 in a lighting display mode. Specifically, the identification segment is displayed with the second identification information "b1." Indicating that it is the previous game section, and the numerical segment is illuminated with the calculated normal base value "36". Is displayed.

  After that, until the total number of outs from the start of the third game section becomes 6000 or more, the display of the normal base value in the above-mentioned current game section to the game section three times before is the display switching time of 5 seconds. It will switch in order as time passes.

  In this way, when displaying the normal base value of the game section where the calculation result of the normal base value is not likely to change, in the same lighting display mode as the display mode when displaying the normal base value with credibility. Since it is displayed, it is possible to easily recognize that there is no possibility that the calculation result of the normal base value will change.

  In the present embodiment, the total number of outs in the first game section is set to 300, but if the value is less than the total out number of 60,000 after the second game section, it is less than 300. It may be more or less. Further, the total number of outs after the second game section may be more or less than 60,000.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the game section is switched during the display of the predetermined normal base value, the display of the normal base value of the predetermined game section is continued until the display switching time elapses. Although the display order is also inherited, it may be started from the display of the normal base value of the current game section at the time when the game section is switched, or after the display switching time has elapsed, the current game section It is also possible to start from displaying the normal base value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal base value is displayed in the blinking display mode, even if the condition for switching the display mode of the normal base value to the lighting display mode is satisfied, the flashing continues until the display switching time elapses. Although the display mode is continued, it may be possible to immediately switch to the lighting display mode when the condition for switching to the lighting display mode is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal base value in each game section is sequentially displayed without an interval period (non-display period), but it is displayed sequentially with an interval period of a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) interposed. You may

  In addition, in the present embodiment, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (at the time when the progress control of the game becomes possible), the operation check of the information display 113 is surely confirmed. Although the display is performed, the operation confirmation display may not be performed after at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process for displaying the set value on the information display 113, or the setting change process. When the setting confirmation process is performed, the operation confirmation display may not be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation confirmation display of the information display 113 is displayed after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed (at the time when the progress control of the game becomes possible). However, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is performed, the operation confirmation display may be performed before the set value is displayed during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. .

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the power is turned on for the first time (the set value is not saved) or the set value saved at the second and subsequent power-on is abnormal, a non-recoverable error occurs and the error information is displayed. Is displayed, the error information displayed on the information display 113 may be different between the former case and the latter case.

(Example of connection configuration of main CPU, first game information display device, and information display)
An example of the connection configuration of the main controller 110m (main CPU 110a), the first game information display device 59, and the information display 113 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Although omitted in the block diagram of FIG. 6, the main controller 110 m is connected to the first game information display device 59 and the information display 113 via the LED driver 114.

  A control signal from the main controller 110m (main CPU 110a) is input to the LED driver 114. Then, the LED driver 114 controls the lighting of the first game information display device 59 and the information display 113 based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  The first game information display device 59 and the information display 113 have four light emitting element (LED) groups consisting of eight light emitting elements (LED), and a total of 32 light emitting elements (LED). have.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, three control signals of a select information signal, an address information signal, and a data information signal are input to the input side of the LED driver 114, and the LED driver 114 The first game information display device 59 and the information display 113 are connected to the output side of.

  The select information signal is a control signal for designating a display device (first game information display device 59, information display 113) for which the LED driver 114 performs lighting control. The LED driver 114 will perform lighting control of either the first game information display device 59 or the information display 113 based on this select information signal.

  The address information signal is a control signal for designating which light emitting element (LED) group in the display device designated by the select information signal is to be turned on. Specifically, if it is specified by the select information signal that the information display 113 is to be lighted, which of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 is to be light-controlled. Is a control signal that specifies.

  The data information signal is control information indicating data on how to control lighting of the light emitting element (LED) group designated by the address information signal. Specifically, in the case where it is specified by the select information signal that the information display 113 is controlled to be turned on and the predetermined 7-segment display is specified by the address information signal, the 7-segment display specified by the address information signal Among the eight light emitting elements (LEDs) in the above, it is a control signal indicating data such as which light emitting element (LED) is turned off and which light emitting element (LED) is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the conventional gaming machine, since the information display 113 is not mounted, only the first gaming information display device 59 is connected to the output side of the LED driver 114, so the input side of the LED driver 114 is connected. , The address information signal and the data information signal were input, and the select information signal was not input (not shown).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, one LED driver 114 is input by inputting a new control signal (select information signal), which is not input in the conventional gaming machine, from the main controller 110m (main CPU 110a) to the LED driver 114. The two display devices (the first game information display device 59 and the information display 113) can be controlled to be turned on.

  Thus, instead of mounting a dedicated LED driver for each display device (first game information display device 59, information display 113), two display devices for one LED driver 114 (first game By connecting the information display device 59 and the information display 113), the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, both the first game information display device 59 and the information display device 113 have four light emitting element (LED) groups including eight light emitting elements (LED). The number of light emitting elements (LEDs) is the same. In this way, by making the configuration of the display device connected to the LED driver 114 common, it is possible to control by a common control method, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control unit 110m (main CPU 110a).

(Main processing of payout controller)
Main processing of the payout controller 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a main process in the payout control unit 121. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the payout CPU 121a.

  First, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts at step H1, makes initial settings of the CPU such as setting of internal registers at step H2, and permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c at step H3.

  The payout CPU 121a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the payout RAM 121c in step H4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step H6.

  In step H7, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the power cutoff is received. When the power cutoff command is received, the process proceeds to step H8, and when the power cutoff command is not received, the process of step H7 is repeatedly executed.

  In step H8, the payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt, and in step H9, loads the number of unpaid balls that have not been paid out of game balls from the payout counter of the payout RAM 121c, and in step H10. , A remaining payout amount designation command corresponding to the loaded unpaid amount is transmitted to the main control board 110.

  The payout CPU 121a clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H11, prohibits RWM access in step H12, and completely cuts off the power supply thereafter. Wait until.

(Modification of main processing of payout control unit)
A modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the main process of the payout control unit 121.

  In this modified example, it is assumed that the backup power is supplied to the payout RAM 121c, and when the payout amount designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the number of prize balls is added to the award ball number area of the payout RAM 121c, and this prize is awarded. It is premised that the payout control board 120 performs a process relating to the payout of prize balls based on the value of the number-of-balls region. Therefore, even when the power cutoff designation command is received from the main control board 110, the remaining payout number designation command is not transmitted to the main control board 110.

  First, in step H1a, the payout CPU 121a prohibits all interrupts, in step H2a, the CPU is initialized such as setting internal registers, and in step H3a, permits access to the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c.

  In step H4a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step H5a as the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step H7a as the first power-on.

  The payout CPU 121a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all the RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c in step H5a, and determines in step H6a whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c and the checksum calculated in step H5a match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is not abnormal), the process proceeds to step H8a. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), in step H7a. , Initializes (clears 0) all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c.

  The payout CPU 121a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step H8a, and permits all interrupts in step H9a.

  In step H10a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. When the power restoration specification command is received (to restore the control state before power-off), the processing is shifted to step H15a, and when the power restoration designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step H11a.

  In step H11a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power-on designation command is received (the control state before power-off is not restored), the process proceeds to step H12a, and if the power-on designation command is not received, the process proceeds to step H15a.

  The payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step H12a, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H13a, and in step H14a. , The areas (including the prize ball number area) other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c are initialized (cleared to 0).

  In step H15a, the payout CPU 121a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power shutdown instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step H10a, and if the power shutdown instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step H16a.

  The payout CPU 121a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step H16a, clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step H17a, and in step H18a. , The launch permission flag saved in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is cleared.

  In step H19a, the payout CPU 121a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the payout RAM 121c and saves the checksum in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

  In step H20a, the payout CPU 121a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c is backed up (power is restored) in the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c, and prohibits the RWM access in step H21a. Perform the process and wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

  In this way, even if the checksum is abnormal, unlike the main control board 110, it is possible to execute the payout control of the game balls by initializing the entire RWM area of the payout RAM 121c without executing the non-recoverable error processing. Therefore, the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game, but the payout control board 120 does not perform only the payout control of the game balls, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 to initialize the areas other than the launch permission flag area of the payout RAM 121c. Therefore, when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized, the RWM area of the payout RAM 121c (prize ball (Including several areas) will also be initialized, the control state of the main control board 110 and the control state of the payout control board 120 can be made uniform, and a situation in which the gaming machine performs an unexpected operation can be avoided. Is possible.

(Timer interrupt processing of payout control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the payout control unit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the payout control unit. The timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the payout control unit 121.

  First, in step H100, the payout CPU 121a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the payout RWM area, and in step H200, performs a timer update process. Specifically, the payout motor 95b driving time. And a process of updating various timer counters such as an interval time provided after paying out the game balls.

  The payout CPU 121a performs a command analysis process in step H300. Specifically, a process of analyzing the command (transmitted from the main control board 110) stored in the receiving buffer of the payout RWM area is performed.

  The payout CPU 121a performs an input control process in step H400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various switches such as the open detection switch 31a, the payout ball detection switch 95a, the full detection switch 32a, the ball detection switch 96a, the lending button detection switch, and the return button detection switch have been input. When there is an input, processing such as setting predetermined data is performed.

  The payout CPU 121a performs prize ball control processing in step H500. Specifically, the processing for paying out the game balls corresponding to the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 from the payout device 95 is performed.

  The payout CPU 121a performs a ball lending control process in step H600. Specifically, when the lending button 20a is operated, one unit of game balls equivalent to 100 yen is provided while performing ball lending communication with a ball lender (not shown) arranged in parallel with the gaming machine 1. As a process for paying out the game balls from the payout device 95 is performed.

  The payout CPU 121a performs a firing permission control process in step H700. Specifically, based on the reception of the firing permission designation command from the main control board 110, the firing permission flag is saved in the firing permission flag area set in the work area of the payout RAM 121c. Further, it is determined whether or not the launch permission flag is saved, and the launch permission condition that is normally connected to the lending device (so-called ball lending machine) arranged in parallel in the gaming machine 1 is satisfied, When the launch permission condition is satisfied, the launch control unit 122 is permitted to launch the game ball, and when the launch permission condition is not fulfilled, the launch control unit 122 is prohibited from firing the game ball. I do.

  The payout CPU 121a performs an abnormality determination process in step H750. Specifically, the occurrence of a plate full error, a ball shortage error, etc. is determined based on the input signals from the full detection switch 32a, the ball presence detection switch 96a, etc., and a plate full error designation command, a ball shortage error designation command, etc. Is performed to the effect control board 130.

  The payout CPU 121a performs a data creation process in step H800. Specifically, external output data output from the game information output terminal board 90 (a prize ball scheduled signal output by one pulse each time the condition for paying out 10 game balls is satisfied, 10 game balls A data creation process is performed to create data such as a winning ball payout signal that is output by one pulse each time the payout is made) and drive data for driving the payout motor 95b.

  The payout CPU 121a performs an output control process in step H900. Specifically, the process of outputting the signals such as the external output data and the drive data created in step H800, the process of outputting the various commands set in step H750 to the effect control board 130, and the like are performed. Note that the payout control unit 121 does not directly send a command to the effect control board 130, but sends a command from the payout control section 121 to the main control board 110, and the command is sent from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. It may be done.

  In step H1000, payout CPU 121a restores the information saved in step H100 to the register of payout CPU 121a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

  Thus, in the payout control unit 121, when the launch permission designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received and normally connected to the lending device juxtaposed in the gaming machine 1, the launch control is performed. In order to allow the part 122 to emit a game ball, the main control board 110 is not performing the game progress control (for example, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clearing process, and during the setting confirmation mode). Even if there is, it is possible to launch the game ball by the launching device 26.

  Further, in the payout control unit 121, since the prize ball control process and the ball lending control process are executed regardless of the control state of the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. Even during execution (for example, during the setting change mode, during the RWM clearing process, and during the setting confirmation mode), it is possible to pay out the game balls.

  Specifically, since the prize balls are paid out based on the receipt of the payout number designation command from the main control board 110, the main control board 110 does not control the progress of the game. During the execution of, it is virtually impossible to pay out the prize balls.

  On the other hand, the payout of the rental ball is not performed based on the reception of the command from the main control board 110, but is performed based on the result of the lending communication with the lending device based on the operation of the lending button 20a by the player. Therefore, even if the main control board 110 is executing the initial setting process in which the progress control of the game is not performed, the payout of the rental ball is possible.

  In addition, when the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during the execution of the initial setting process), the launch control unit 122 may prohibit the launch of the game ball. In this case, when the main control board 110 is controlling the progress of the game (for example, after the initial setting process and the payout control process of step S500 of the timer interrupt process), the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c. It is advisable to set the launch permission designation command to, and to send the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the output control process of step S800 thereafter.

  Further, when the main control board 110 is not controlling the progress of the game (during the initialization process), the payout of the game balls (at least one of the prize balls and the ball rental balls) may be prohibited. Good. In this case, the payout of gaming balls is prohibited until the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, and when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110, It is advisable to allow the payout of gaming balls.

(Main process of production control unit)
Main processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130m. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the sub CPU 130a.

  First, in step E1, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts, in step E2, CPU initialization such as setting of internal registers is performed, and in step E3, access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is permitted.

  The sub CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub RAM 130c in step E4, and generates a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E5. CTC (counter timer circuit) is activated, and all interrupts are permitted in step E6.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a sub random number updating process in step E7. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Modification of main process of production control unit)
A modified example of the main process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the main process in the effect control unit 130m. In this modification, it is assumed that backup power is supplied to the sub RAM 130c.

  First, in step E1a, the sub CPU 130a prohibits all interrupts, in step E2a, the CPU is initialized, such as by setting the internal register, and in step E3a, the access to the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is permitted.

  In step E4a, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step E5a as a power restoration, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step E8a as a first power-on.

  The sub CPU 130a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c in step E5a, and determines in step E6a whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c matches the checksum calculated in step E5a. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is not abnormal), the process proceeds to step E7a. If the checksum is abnormal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process proceeds to step E8a. Transfer processing.

  In step E7a, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) an area other than the history information area of the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is cut off (power failure) will be inherited even after the power is restored.

  In step E8a, the sub CPU 130a initializes (resets) all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the game history information saved in the history information area before the power is cut off (power failure) will not be taken over after the power is restored.

  The sub CPU 130a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step E9a, permits all interrupts in step E10a, and executes a sub random number updating process in step E11a. I do. Specifically, a process of updating various random number values stored in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c is performed.

  In step E12a, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the power cutoff designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. If the power cutoff command is received, the process proceeds to step E13a. If the power cutoff command is not received, the process proceeds to step E11a.

  The sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt prohibition that prohibits a timer interrupt in step E13a, and clears the output port in order to stop the operation of various drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) in step E14a.

  In step E15a, the sub CPU 130a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of all RWM areas of the sub RAM 130c, and saves the check sum in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality of the RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

  In step E16a, the sub CPU 130a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the RWM area is backed up in the RWM area of the sub RAM 130c (power is restored), prohibits RWM access in step E17a, and thereafter. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

  As described above, unlike the payout control unit 121, it does not determine whether or not the power-on designation command is received and initialize the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c. Even when the RWM clear is executed, the game history information can be taken over, and the player can be provided with the game history information for a long period of time.

  Note that it may be determined whether or not the power-on designation command has been received, and when the power-on designation command is received, the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c may be initialized. Further, only the history information area may be initialized instead of the entire RWM area of the sub RAM 130c.

(Timer interrupt process of production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130m. This timer interrupt process is executed by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area of the effect RWM area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs the timer update process. Specifically, a process of updating various timer counters necessary to execute the effect is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E300. Specifically, a process of analyzing a command (transmitted from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the reception buffer of the RWM area for effect is performed. The details of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step E400, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect control processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol and the special game (big hit game, small hit game) are not executed, Based on the lapse of the waiting time, a process for executing a customer waiting effect for agitating the player's willingness to play a game is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs effect input control processing in step E500. Specifically, during the variation effect, based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period, the operation notice effect that expects the special game to be executed is executed, or the special game is executed. A process for executing an operation-deciding effect whether or not it is executed is performed, and in the customer waiting state, it is saved in the sub RAM 130c based on the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 during the effective period. The game history information is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the game history information saved in the sub RAM 130c is initialized (reset).

  The sub CPU 130a performs effect mode update processing in step E600. Specifically, update of the effect mode (effect stage) in which effect elements (background image, effect image, effect sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether or not a condition (change of game state, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP / SPSP reach production that results are lost, etc.) is established, and if the update condition is established, a plurality of production modes are produced. Processing for updating to any of the modes is performed.

  "Production mode" is a production mode A to C set in the low-probability non-short time gaming state, a production mode D to E set in the low-probability short time gaming state, and a production mode set in the high-probability short time gaming state. F to G are provided. In addition, when the power is turned on, when it is controlled to a low-probability non-time saving game state (for example, after changing the setting, after clearing the RWM, after confirming the setting, etc.), the first production mode is always the production mode A. The production mode that is initially set when the power is turned on is controlled to the low-probability time short game state is always the production mode D, and when the power is turned on, the high-precision time short game state is controlled. The production mode initially set is the production mode F.

The sub CPU 130a performs a game history update process in step E700. Specifically, the game history information (variation effect count, jackpot count, jackpot probability, small hit count, small hit probability, etc.) saved in the sub RAM 130c is used to determine the progress of the game (variable attraction, jackpot game, small hit game). (Execution) to perform processing for updating.
The game history information may be displayed in the customer waiting state, may be displayed by operating the effect button 17 or the like in the customer waiting state, and may be displayed in the firing handle 15 during the customer waiting effect. It may be displayed when the touch sensor 15a detects the player's hand, or may be displayed at the start of the variation effect. Further, whether or not to display the game history information may be selectable (settable) by an operation of a game store clerk.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the backup power is not supplied to the effect control unit 130m, the information displayed as the game history information is the information for the current day, but the backup power is supplied as in the modification of FIG. If yes, information for several days (for example, two days ago, one day ago, the current day, etc.) may be displayed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a data creation process in step E750. Specifically, the special symbol sub-display 69a, 69b, the normal symbol sub-display 69c, the special symbol holding sub-display 69d, 69e, the normal symbol holding sub-display 69f, and outputs to the right-handed sub-display 69g Performs data creation processing for various display control data.

  The sub CPU 130a performs an output control process in step E800. Specifically, processing for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c and various display control data created by the data creation processing to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150 is performed.

  In step E900, the sub CPU 130a restores the register saved in the production RWM area in step E100 described above, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis process of production control unit)
The command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the effect control unit 130m.

  First, in step E301, the sub CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c and determines whether or not a command is received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302, and if no command has been received, this command analysis process ends.

  In step E302, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change designation command. If it is a setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change designation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process in step E303. Specifically, a process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting change notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the setting change notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E306, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation designation command. If the command is a setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not the setting confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step E308.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process in step E307. Specifically, the process of setting the notification instruction command for starting the above-described setting confirmation notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the setting confirmation notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E308, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. If it is the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command, the process proceeds to step E310.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a power ON notification process in step E309. Specifically, when the received command is a power-on designation command, the notification instruction command for executing the above-described power-on notification is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the received command is the power restoration specification command. If it is, the processing of setting the notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E310, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error system designation command. If it is an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not an error system designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

  "Error system designation command" includes non-recoverable error designation command, illegal winning error designation command, abnormal winning error designation command, magnetic error designation command, radio wave error designation command, door opening error start designation command, door opening error end designation Commands etc. are included.

  The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E311. Specifically, it performs error notification according to the type of received error specification command (unrecoverable error notification, incorrect winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, etc.) In order to do so, the processing of setting the notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the central control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing various error notifications is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E312, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E313, and if it is not the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step E314.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect preparation process in step E313. Specifically, a customer waiting effect standby flag and a customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) before starting the customer waiting effect are set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c. Thereby, in the above-mentioned customer waiting effect control process, the customer waiting effect waiting flag and the customer waiting time are referred to, and the processing for executing the customer waiting effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E314, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E315, and if it is not the game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E316.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a game state setting process in step E315. Specifically, a process of updating the game state stored in the sub RAM 130c to the game state according to the game state designation command is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E316, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage designation command. If it is a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E317. If it is not a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step E318.

  In step E317, the sub CPU 130a performs a pending quantity update process. Specifically, a production instruction command for updating the special figure reservation number stored in the sub RAM 130c and increasing or decreasing the reservation icon displayed on the first image display device 70 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. Perform processing to As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for increasing or decreasing the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E318, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start mouth prize designation command. If the command is a start mouth prize designation command, the received start mouth prize designation command (special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern) is set in the pre-read storage area of the sub RAM 130c, which will be described later, and then the processing is moved to step E319 to specify the start mouth prize designation. If it is not a command, the process proceeds to step E320.

  The "prefetch storage area" is a first prefetch storage unit for sequentially storing the prefetch information (variable pattern, etc.) based on the first start mouth winning designation command, and the hold information based on the second start mouth winning designation command. Is divided into a second prefetch storage unit for sequentially storing the prefetch information and a prefetch information unit for storing prefetch information corresponding to the variable display (fluctuation effect) being executed, and the first prefetch The storage unit and the second prefetch storage unit are divided into first to fourth storage units, respectively.

  The first to fourth storage units of the first look-ahead storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-described first special figure determination information holding storage area, respectively, and receive the first start mouth prize designation command. Then, the read-ahead information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to be moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a smaller number every time the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the first special symbol is executed.

  The first to fourth storage units of the second prefetch storage unit correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the above-mentioned second special figure determination information holding storage area, respectively, and receive the second starting mouth prize designation command. Then, the prefetch information is stored in the storage unit corresponding to the second special figure reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each storage unit is adapted to be moved (shifted) to a storage unit having a smaller number every time the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed.

  The storage unit (0th storage unit) corresponds to the special symbol determination information execution storage region described above, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first storage unit of the first prefetch storage unit. The readahead information that is moved (shifted) is stored, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the readahead information that is moved (shifted) from the first storage unit of the second readahead unit is stored. It

  In step E319, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetching effect determination process. Specifically, expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over the variable display (variable effect) of one or more special symbols (suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed). Whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect is determined, and the type of the pre-reading effect to be executed is determined, and a process for setting the effect instruction command for executing the pre-reading effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the prefetching effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  As the look-ahead effect, a predetermined icon is displayed during the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 or an icon change effect that displays the icon in a special display mode different from the normal display mode, or during one or more variable displays (fluctuation effects). There is a look-ahead continuous notice effect that executes the effect of.

  In step E320, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If the command is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not the special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E322.

  In step E321, the sub CPU 130a performs a symbol data determination process. Specifically, a process of determining an effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device 70 as a result of the variable effect, that is, an array (combination) of the effect symbols stopped on a predetermined effective line is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E322, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If it is the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E323, and if it is not the special figure variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E326.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a change effect pattern determination process in step E323. Specifically, based on the special figure fluctuation pattern specified by the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the fluctuation effect pattern determination table (not shown), the effect mode of the fluctuation effect executed by the effect device including the image display devices 70 and 71. Is performed, and a production instruction command for executing the variation production is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a notice effect determination process in step E324. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step E323, a jackpot announcement effect that causes the jackpot game to be executed (indicates that the jackpot game may be executed) is executed. Whether or not to determine the type of jackpot notice effect to be executed, and performs a process of setting the effect instruction command for executing the jackpot notification effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM130c. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the jackpot notice effect is performed.

  In step E325, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect execution process. Specifically, a process of setting a production instruction command for starting the prefetching effect determined in the prefetching effect determining process of step E319 or changing the effect mode in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the process for executing the prefetching effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E326, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a symbol determination command. If it is the symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E327, and if it is not the symbol confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E328.

  The sub CPU 130a performs effect symbol stop processing in step E327. Specifically, a process of setting an effect instruction command for stopping and displaying the effect symbols in the temporary stop state and ending the variable effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for ending the variable effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

  In step E328, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game system designation command. If the command is the special game system designation command, the process proceeds to step E329, and if it is not the special game system designation command, the command analysis process this time is ended.

  The "special game system designation command" includes a big hit opening designation command, a big hit round designation command, a big hit ending designation command, a small hit opening designation command, a small hit ending designation command, and the like.

  The sub CPU 130a performs a special game effect determination process in step E329. Specifically, in the case of the opening designation command, a process of setting the effect instruction command for determining the opening effect of the big hit game or the small hit game and executing the opening effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. In the case of the designated command, the process of setting the production instruction command for determining the round effect of the round game and executing the round effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and in the case of the ending instruction command, the jackpot game or Processing for determining an ending effect of the small hit game and setting an effect instruction command for executing the ending effect in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is performed. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the overall control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150, and the processing for executing the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect is performed. When this process ends, the command analysis process this time ends.

(Time chart when changing settings)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a time chart when the setting is changed.

  At the timing of T1, the setting key switch 112a is turned on, and at the timing of T2 when the setting key switch 112a is turned on, when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting is performed. The mode shifts to a setting change mode for changing the value (no winning detection of a game ball or occurrence of an error is detected).

  When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, a setting change signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal, the status confirmation display 68 is turned on, and the information display 113 displays the current set value (any one of 1 to 4). Is displayed to notify that the setting is changed in the rendering device (sound output device 9, frame lighting device 10, image display devices 70 and 71, and panel lighting device 74). Setting change notification is performed.

Next, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off at the timing of T3, the setting change mode ends, so the state confirmation display 68 is turned off, and the information display 113 ends displaying the set value. Then, when the setting change mode (setting change process) ends, a RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is executed. Further, in the effect device, setting change notification is continuously performed.
The output of the setting change signal (security signal) is not stopped immediately after the setting change mode is finished and is output for 0.2 seconds, so that it is output at the timing of T3.

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear processing is completed, the information display 113 displays an operation confirmation display that repeats all lighting for 0.3 seconds and all lighting for 0.3 seconds for a predetermined period (here, 5 seconds). ). Then, in the effect device, the setting change notification ends, and the power-on notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized is started.

  When the RWM clear processing is completed, the security signal terminal outputs the RWM clear signal (security signal), but the setting signal (security signal) is continuously output from the security signal terminal until timing T5. Therefore, the output is suspended and not output at the timing of the present T4.

  Next, at the timing of T5, the output of the setting changing signal (security signal), which has been continuously output, stops. Since there is a 0.2-second security terminal suspension period (interval period) from the output of the setting change signal (security signal) to the timing of T6, the RWM clear signal is also generated at the timing of T5. (Security signal) is not output.

  After that, at the timing of T6 when the stop period (interval period) has elapsed, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) whose output has been suspended is started.

  That is, the RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is output at the timing of T6 after the timing of T4 when the power-on notification indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is started. become. By doing so, even when the RWM clear signal (security signal) cannot be output at the same time as the completion of the RWM clear processing, the power-on notification is performed at the same time as the completion of the RWM clear processing, so the notification is made without delay from the completion of the RWM clear processing. be able to.

  Then, at the timing of T7, which is 0.2 seconds after the timing of T6, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is stopped. Further, similarly to the setting changing signal (security signal), there is a stop period (interval period) of 0.2 seconds (until the timing of T8) even after the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is stopped.

  After that, when the operation confirmation display on the information display 113 is completed at the timing of T9, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display 113.

  In this way, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the state confirmation display 68 and the effect device provided on the front (front) side of the gaming machine are informed that the mode is the setting change mode. A game store clerk other than the existing game store clerk can easily grasp the state of the game machine.

  Further, since the setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output for 0.2 seconds without stopping the output immediately after the setting change mode ends, the hall computer which is an external device of the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the information collecting device such as the above from dropping the setting change signal (security signal).

  Also, after the output of the security signal is stopped, it is possible to prevent the security signal from continuing to be output by providing a security terminal stop period (interval period) before the next security signal is output. It is possible to correctly inform the number of times the signal has been output.

  When the setting change mode (RWM clear processing) ends, the information display 113 performs an operation check (operation check display), while the status check display 68 does not check an operation. Therefore, by confirming the operation of the information display 113 that displays the set value (which is more important than the status confirmation display 68), it can be confirmed that the set value that has already been set is the intended set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being set unintentionally. Further, even if there is a problem in the status confirmation display 68 that indicates that the setting change mode is in effect, there is no problem in changing the set value, so that the operation is not confirmed to simplify the processing and reduce the processing load. Can be reduced.

(Time chart for clearing RWM)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a time chart when the RWM is cleared.

  At the timing of T1, when the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is executed.

  Then, at the timing of T2, when the RWM clear process ends, the information display 113 displays an operation confirmation display that repeats all lighting for 0.3 seconds and all lighting for 0.3 seconds for a predetermined period (here, 5 seconds). ). Then, in the effect device, the power-on notification is started. Further, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started from the security signal terminal.

  That is, when the RWM clear without the setting change is performed, unlike the case where the RWM clear with the setting change is performed, the RWM clear signal (security signal) is output immediately after the RWM clear is completed. The timing is approximately the same as the timing at which the power-on notification is started.

At the timing of T3, which is 0.2 seconds after the timing of T2, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is stopped.
The period from the timing T3 to the timing T4 is the output suspension period (0.2 seconds) of the security signal terminal.

  After that, when the operation confirmation display on the information display 113 is finished at the timing of T5, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display 113.

  In this way, the RWM clear signal (security signal) continues to be output for 0.2 seconds without stopping the output immediately after the RWM clear processing is completed, so that it is an external device of the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the information collecting device such as a computer from missing the setting change signal (security signal).

  Also, after the output of the security signal is stopped, it is possible to prevent the security signal from continuing to be output by providing a security terminal stop period (interval period) before the next security signal is output. It is possible to correctly inform the number of times the signal has been output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) when the RWM clear accompanied by the setting change is performed is 0.4 seconds after the setting change mode is finished (setting is being changed). The signal output time 0.2 seconds + stop period 0.2 seconds), while the RWM clear signal (security signal) is output when the RWM clear without setting change is performed, the RWM clear processing ends. Then, it outputs it immediately. By doing so, the RWM clear without the setting change, which has a simple procedure, can execute the RWM clear more easily than the RWM clear with the setting change, and there is a possibility that the RWM clear is illegally executed. Therefore, in the RWM clear without changing the setting, it is possible to prevent fraud by outputting the security signal promptly.

(Time chart when confirming settings)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a time chart when confirming the settings.

  At the timing of T1, the setting key switch 112a is turned on, and at the timing of T2 when the setting key switch 112a is turned on, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the settings saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c are set. Move to the setting confirmation mode to confirm the value.

  When the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, a setting confirmation in-progress signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal, the state confirmation display 68 is turned on, and the information display 113 displays the current set value (any one of 1 to 4). ) Is displayed, and the production device starts setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode ends, so the state confirmation display 68 is turned off, and the information display 113 finishes displaying the set value, An operation confirmation display that repeats all lighting for 3 seconds and all extinguishing for 0.3 seconds is displayed for a predetermined period (here, 5 seconds), and in the production device, the setting confirmation notification ends, and the game is controlled. The power restoration notification is started to recognize that the state has returned to the state before the power was cut off.
The output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) is not stopped immediately after the setting confirmation mode is ended and is continuously output for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, the setting confirmation signal is output at the timing of T3.

After that, at the timing of T4, the output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal), which has been continuously output, stops.
The period from the timing T4 to the timing T5 is the output suspension period (0.2 seconds) of the security signal terminal.

  Then, when the operation confirmation display on the information display 113 is completed at the timing of T6, the normal base value in the current game section is displayed on the information display 113.

  In this way, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the state confirmation display 68 and the effect device provided on the front (front surface) side of the gaming machine are informed that the mode is the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the setting confirmation operation is performed. A game store clerk other than the existing game store clerk can easily grasp the state of the game machine.

  Further, since the setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output for 0.2 seconds without stopping the output immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, the hall computer which is an external device of the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the information collecting apparatus such as the above from dropping the setting confirmation signal (security signal).

  When the setting confirmation mode ends, the information display 113 performs operation confirmation (operation confirmation display), while the state confirmation display 68 does not perform operation confirmation. Therefore, by confirming the operation of the information display 113 that displays the set value (which is more important than the status confirmation display 68), it is possible to prevent an unintended set value from being set. . Further, even if there is a problem in the status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the setting confirmation mode is in effect, there is no problem in confirming the set value. Therefore, by not performing the operation confirmation, the processing is simplified and the processing load is reduced. Can be reduced.

(Time chart when a non-recoverable error occurs)
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a time chart when the setting is changed. Here, it is assumed that when the non-recoverable error occurs, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off in the state where the non-recoverable error occurs.

When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing T1 when the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are off, the setting change mode is not entered, so the non-recoverable error is not canceled and the information display 113 is displayed. Then, error information “E” (error display) indicating a non-recoverable error is displayed, and the production device starts the non-recoverable error notification. Further, a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal.
It should be noted that the status confirmation display 68 is off while the non-recoverable error is occurring.

  Since the non-recoverable error is not released until the setting is changed, the non-recoverable error signal (security signal) is output, the error display is displayed on the information display 113, until the power of the gaming machine is turned off at the timing of T2. Also, the non-recoverable error notification on the first image display device 70 is continued.

  In this way, if a non-recoverable error occurs, the non-recoverable error will not be canceled even if the power is turned ON / OFF or the RWM clear processing is performed, unless the setting is changed. It is possible to prevent the game from being started with a setting value that is not set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, and the convenience of the gaming machine can be improved.

  The setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the non-recoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common signal terminal.

Further, after outputting the security signal, the security terminal stop period (interval period) was set to 0.2 seconds, but it is not limited to 0.2 seconds and may be a time shorter than 0.2 seconds or a long time. But good.
Further, the stop period (interval period) may not be provided. In this case, for example, when the setting is changed, the security signal is continuously output for 0.2 seconds after the end of the RWM clear processing from the timing when the setting change is started. Just do it.

(Time chart when winning a prize at the starting port)
FIG. 60A is a diagram showing a time chart when a game ball wins the first starting opening 45 and the second starting opening 47.

  First, at the timing of T1, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 45, an external information 1 signal indicating that the game ball has won in the first starting port 45 is output from the external information 1 output terminal for 0.2 seconds. It

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the output period (0.2 seconds) of the external information 1 signal ends, the 0.2 second external information 1 signal terminal stop period (interval period) starts. Further, at the timing of T2, when the game ball wins the second starting opening 47, the external information 1 signal for the current winning is output immediately because it is the stop period (interval period) of the external information 1 signal terminal. Output is suspended.

  Then, at the timing of T3, when the stop period (interval period) of the external information 1 signal terminal ends, the game ball starts to output the external information 1 signal for the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 47 whose output has been suspended. (0.2 seconds).

  After that, similarly, if the timing at which the game ball wins each of the starting openings 45 and 47 is the output period of the external information 1 signal for the previous winning, the external information for the current winning after the output period for the previous winning ends. Output of one signal is started.

  Although not shown, other external information signals other than the external information signal for the fixed stop of the special symbol described later (for example, the external information signal for the general winning opening 43, the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening) The external information signal for 53, the external information signal for prize balls, etc.) is also output for 0.2 seconds, and then a stop period (interval period) of 0.2 seconds is provided.

  In this way, regardless of the type of external information signal (including security signal), the output time of a plurality of types of external information signals excluding a specific external signal is common, so that the processing is simplified and the processing load is reduced. be able to.

(Time chart when special symbols stop)
FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stopped.

  First, at the timing of T1, the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, and at the timing of T2, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends, the fixed stop for 0.5 seconds starts.

  Then, when the fixed stop is started at the timing of T2, the output of the external information 2 signal indicating that the special symbol is fixedly stopped is started from the external information 2 output terminal.

  Then, at the timing of T3, when the fixed stop time of the first special symbol of 0.5 seconds ends, the output of the external information 2 signal also ends.

  In other words, the output time of the external information 2 signal is synchronized with the fixed stop time of the special symbol, and 0.5 seconds is output similarly to the fixed stop time of the special symbol.

  Also, in the case of the second special symbol, at the timing of T4, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts, and at the timing of T5, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol ends and the fixed stop starts, the external information. The output of the external information 2 signal is started from the 2 output terminal.

  Then, at the timing of T6, when the fixed stop time of the second special symbol ends, the output of the external information 2 signal also ends.

  As described above, the output time of the external information 2 signal with respect to the fixed stop is synchronized with the fixed stop time of the special symbol, and is different from the output time of other external information signals (security signals). In this way, by synchronizing the output time of the external information signal for the fixed stop with the fixed stop time of the special symbol, the information that the game store grasps at the time of the special symbol fixed stop (the fixed stop time of the special symbol) and the player It is possible to eliminate the discrepancy with the information to be grasped (determined stop time of special symbols).

The output time of the external information signal with respect to the fixed stop may be the same as the output time of the other external information signal (including the security signal).
The output time may be different for each type of external information signal. Even when the output time is different for each type of external information signal (including the security signal), the stop period (interval period) may be common. By doing so, the type of the external information signal (including the security signal) can be notified by the difference in the output time, and the stop period (interval period) is common, so that the processing load can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel in parallel, and the external information 2 signal for the fixed stop of the first special symbol and the fixed stop of the second special symbol Since the output timing of the external information 2 signal does not overlap with that of the external information 2 signal, the stop period (interval period) is not provided after the output of the external information 2 signal is stopped, but it may be provided. By doing so, even when the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel in parallel (so-called simultaneous variation), the external information 2 for the fixed stop of the first special symbol It is possible to prevent the signal and the output of the external information 2 signal for the fixed stop of the second special symbol from overlapping, and it is possible to correctly notify the number of times the external information 2 signal is output.

(Main processing of integrated control unit)
Main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed by inputting the system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the overall CPU 141a.

  First, the overall CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, CPU initialization such as setting of internal registers, access permission to the general RAM 141c, initialization of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c (0 clear), and CTC (counter timer circuit for generating a timer interrupt). In step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

  The overall CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the image display device (the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, the first image display device 70, A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the two-image display device 71) and switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and the light amount is performed. The details of the adjustment mode switching process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

  The overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the sound output device 9 outputs based on a detection signal (a left button detection signal, a right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Processing for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound. The details of the volume adjustment processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

  The overall CPU 141a performs a light amount adjustment process in step T6. Specifically, based on a detection signal (a lower button detection signal, an upper button detection signal) from a cross key detection switch 19a that detects an operation of the cross key 19 which can be operated by the player, the image display device (first image). A process for adjusting the light amount (value) of the backlight of the display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is performed.

  Note that not only the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is adjusted, but the light amount of the LEDs provided in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 is adjusted. May be adjusted together, and instead of adjusting the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device may be adjusted. You may make it possible to adjust only the light quantity of LED provided in the illuminating device 74.

  The overall CPU 141a performs an eco mode control process in step T7. Specifically, processing for controlling the start and end of the eco mode in which the light amount of the backlight of the image display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reduced to reduce power consumption is performed. .

  In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

  In step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, a process of determining an animation pattern from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

  The overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process of determining a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and setting (setting) it in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c is performed.

  In step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the frame switching flag indicating the frame update timing for updating the display images on the image display devices 70 and 71 is set in the overall RAM 141c. If there is a frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process proceeds to step T4.

  The frame switching flag is set in a V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 described later. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

  The general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c in step T12, and performs a scene update process in step T13. Specifically, the scene switching counter, the wait frame counter, and the frame counter, which are updated in the V blank interrupt process to be described later, are referred to and the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9. Then, processing for updating the address of the sound scene is performed based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

  The overall CPU 141a performs a drawing control process in step T14. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, the drawing control command group is formed from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address. A display list is generated, the display list is output to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and processing for instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list is performed.

  As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer and also displays the images (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn in the display frame buffer. The process of displaying on the (first image display device, second image display device 71) is performed.

  The overall CPU 141a performs a voice control process in step T15. Specifically, a process of generating a voice control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputting the voice control command to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

  As a result, the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) performs a process of outputting various effect sounds and notification sounds based on the voice control command from the voice output device 9. When this process ends, the process moves to step T4.

(Command reception interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. This command reception interrupt process is executed by receiving various commands transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

  First, the overall CPU 141a performs a command reception process in step T30. Specifically, when the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m is received, the processing is stored in the reception buffer of the general RAM 141c. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt process this time ends.

(V blank interrupt process of integrated control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62B is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141. The V blank interrupt process is executed each time the V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) is finished (about 33 milliseconds) after the display of the effect image for one frame is completed (about 33 milliseconds).

  First, the overall CPU 141a performs a counter updating process in step T50. Specifically, a process of updating the counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) used in the animation control process and the like by +1 is performed.

  In step T51, the overall CPU 141a performs frame buffer switching command processing. Specifically, the image control unit 145 (VDP) is instructed to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM. As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 milliseconds), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become the “drawing frame buffer” and the “display frame”. It will be switched to "buffer" alternately.

  In step T52, the overall CPU 141a sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched to a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends the V blank interrupt process this time. The frame switching flag is referred to in step T11 of the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

(Adjustment mode switching process of integrated control unit)
The adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the adjustment mode switching process of the overall control unit 141.

  First, in step T4-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the overall RAM 141c has already been set with an adjustment mode for adjusting the volume and the amount of light. If the adjustment mode has not been set (this process is first executed after power-on), the process proceeds to step T4-3. If the adjustment mode has been set, the process proceeds to step T4-2. Transfer.

  In step T4-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the state of the changeover switch 22 has changed. Specifically, the current state of the changeover switch 22 is compared with the previous state of the changeover switch 22 stored in the general RAM 141c in step T4-5 described later. If the state of the change-over switch 22 has changed, the process is moved to step T4-3 to set the adjustment mode, and if the state of the change-over switch 22 has not changed, the adjustment mode is not set. Then, the adjustment mode switching process of this time is ended.

  In step T4-3, the overall CPU 141a selects the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 64B, and in step T4-4, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16) corresponding to the switch position of the changeover switch 22, the reference The information and the power saving mode (ON, OFF) are specified and set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c. The reference information includes whether or not the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted using the cross key 19, the volume value adjustment range in the volume adjustment, the initial value of the volume value of the effect sound, and the image display devices 70 and 71 using the cross key 19. Of the light amount of the backlight, the adjustment range of the light amount value in the light amount adjustment, and the initial value of the light amount value of the backlight.

  In step T4-5, the overall CPU 141a sets the current state (switch position) of the changeover switch 22 in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c, and ends this adjustment mode switching process. The state of the changeover switch 22 set here is referred to in step T4-2.

(Changeover switch and adjustment mode selection table)
The changeover switch 22 and the adjustment mode selection table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64A is a diagram showing the external appearance of the changeover switch 22, and FIG. 64B is a diagram showing an adjustment mode selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 64A, the changeover switch 22 is rotatably (360 degrees) pivotally supported with respect to the switch body 22a having a plurality of (for example, 16) selection terminals inside. It is a non-shorting type rotary switch having an operating section 22b that operates, and by rotating the operating section 22b, the selection terminal connected to the common terminal of the operating section 22b changes and the switch switches (switch position changes). To do).

  Further, 16 scales (0 to F) indicating the position (contact point) of the selection terminal to which the common terminal is connected are provided on the upper surface of the switch body 22a, and the common terminal is connected to the operation portion 22b. An arrow indicating the selection terminal is provided. Therefore, it is possible to grasp the state of the switch (switch position) by the scale of the switch body 22a and the arrow of the operation portion 22b.

  The changeover switch 22 may be configured by a slide switch that opens and closes the contacts by linearly sliding the operation unit, or a dip switch that changes the contacts by operating any of the plurality of operation units. You may comprise by.

  As shown in FIG. 64B, in the adjustment mode selection table, the switch position (0 to F) of the changeover switch 22, the adjustment mode (modes 1 to 16), the reference information (volume adjustment possibility, volume value adjustment). The range, volume initial value, light quantity adjustment availability, light quantity value adjustment range, light quantity initial value) are associated with the power saving mode settings.

  For example, when the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is "1", "mode 2" is set as the adjustment mode, "possible (variable)" is set as the volume adjustment possibility, and "1 to 1" is set as the volume value adjustment range. 5 "is set," 1 "is set as the volume initial value," possible (variable) "is set as the light amount adjustment propriety," 1-5 "is set as the light amount value adjustment range, and" 1 "is set as the light amount initial value. "1" is set, and "OFF" is set as the power saving mode.

  The first feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 64 (b) is that volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are possible (variable) in adjustment modes 1 to 6 in which the switch position of the changeover switch 22 is in the range of 0 to 5. In the adjustment modes 7 to 11 that are set and the switch position is in the range of 6 to A, the volume adjustment is possible (variable), but the light amount adjustment is not possible (fixed), and the adjustment mode is in the range of B to F. In Nos. 16 to 16, the volume adjustment is impossible (fixed) but the light amount adjustment is possible (variable). By doing so, it becomes possible to select (set) whether or not to adjust the volume and the amount of light by roughly operating the changeover switch 22, and the convenience at the time of operation by the game shop staff is improved.

  The second feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 64 (b) is that the volume initial value and the light amount initial value are set by switching the adjustment mode by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the volume (value) and the light amount (value) also by operating the changeover switch 22, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game shop staff.

  The third feature of the adjustment mode selection table shown in FIG. 64 (b) is that the power saving (eco) mode is set to OFF in the adjustment modes 1 to 6 and the adjustment modes 12 to 16, and the adjustment modes 7 to 11 are set in the adjustment modes 7 to 11. The power saving (eco) mode is set to ON, and it is possible to set ON / OFF of the power saving mode by operating the changeover switch 22. By doing so, it is possible to set whether the power saving mode is ON or OFF depending on the intention of the gaming shop side, and it is possible to control the power consumption of the gaming machine 1 to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the operating cost of the entire game store.

(Voice management table)
The voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a voice management table stored in the voice ROM 149.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the voice management table, the sound number of the voice data, the type of the voice data, the output format of the voice data (stereo, monaural), the priority of the voice data, and the output volume of the voice data are stored. They are associated with each other, and the explanation of the system sound is described as a reference.

The sound numbers “1” to “12” are notification sounds related to the security of the gaming machine 1, the output format is “monaural”, and the priority is set to “high”, “medium”, or “low”. Some are output with a fixed volume (MAX volume corresponding to the volume value “5”), and some are output depending on the volume value.
The sound numbers “13” to “100” are effect sounds related to effects on the gaming machine 1, the output format is “monaural” or “stereo”, the priority is set to “low”, and all are volume levels. The volume is output depending on the value.
The sound numbers “101” to “105” are notification sounds related to the adjusted sound volume, the output format is “monaural”, the priority is set to “low”, and all sound volumes depend on the sound volume value. Is output.

The "power-on notification sound" is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the RWM area of the main RAM 110c (payout RAM 121c) is initialized (setting change, RWM clear). ).
The “power restoration notification sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is restored.
The "non-recoverable error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) that is output until the power is turned off when an unrecoverable error occurs in which the progress of the game is stopped in the main control board 110.
The “setting change notification sound” is a setting that is output while the setting is being changed (when the setting change mode is entered) while the setting is being changed (when the setting change mode is entered). This is a notification sound indicating that the change is in progress.
"Setting confirmation notification sound" is a setting that is output while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting confirmation mode is entered), while the setting confirmation is being performed (when the setting confirmation mode is entered). This is a notification sound indicating that confirmation is in progress.

"Unauthorized winning error sound", the game ball is won in the second start opening 47 when not in the auxiliary game, or the game ball is won in the big winning hole when not in the special game (big hit game, small hit game) This is a notification sound (error sound) that is output even when the power is turned off when an illegal prize winning error such as a hit occurs.
"Abnormal winning error sound" is output until the power is turned off when an abnormal winning error occurs in which the number of gaming balls won at various winning openings does not match the number of gaming balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning balls to flow down. This is a notification sound (error sound).
The “magnetic error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a magnetic error that detects an abnormal magnetic force occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 55a.
The “radio wave error sound” is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) when a radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave is generated by the radio wave detection sensor 56a.
The "door opening error sound" is a notification sound (error sound) output over the opening period when a door opening error occurs when the opening detection switch 31a detects opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4. Is.
The "dish full error sound" is output over the period when the game ball is full when a plate full error that detects that the lower plate 12 is full of the game ball is generated by the full detection switch 32a. This is a notification sound (error sound).
"Right hitting error sound" is a right hitting error in which a game ball is detected at the universal figure gate 44 or the second starting opening 47 in a period (for example, a normal game state) in which the right hitting at the right game area should not be performed. At this time, it is a notification sound (error sound) output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

  It should be noted that a priority is set for the notification sound in accordance with the importance of the security abnormality (error), and the priority is set to be higher for an abnormality that may lead to fraudulent activity. Therefore, when a plurality of security anomalies with different priorities occur at the same time, it is controlled so that only one notification sound with a high priority can be heard. For example, when the door opening error sound of the sound number “10” is output and a magnetic error of the sound number “8” occurs, the door opening error sound of the sound number “10” is muted as an inaudible sound ( Mute) and output a magnetic error sound. Then, when the output period of the magnetic error sound elapses, the output of the magnetic error sound is stopped, and if the output period of the door open error has not elapsed, the volume of the door open error sound is restored to the volume before the mute. Has become.

  Therefore, even if a security abnormality (error) with a low priority sound number occurs while outputting a notification sound with a high priority sound number, the notification sound with a low priority sound number should not be output. become. Further, when a security abnormality (error) having the same priority occurs, a notification sound corresponding to the security abnormality (error) that occurs later is output.

  Further, while outputting the effect sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound at the audible volume, the notification sound of which the output volume is set to the fixed volume (volume value “5”) has the priority “high” or “medium”. To start the output of the current volume value, the current volume value saved in the volume value area of the general RAM 141c is saved in the save area of the general RAM 141c, and then the current volume value is inaudible. By setting the volume change command to “0” and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148, the effect sound (BGM or the like) and the volume notification sound are output at an inaudible volume.

  Also, during output of the effect sound (BGM, etc.) and the volume notification sound at an inaudible volume, the output volume is set to a fixed volume (volume value “5”) and the priority is “high” or “medium”. When the sound output is ended, the effect sound (BGM or the like) is generated by returning the volume value saved in the save area of the general RAM 141c to the volume value area and outputting the volume change command to the voice control unit 148. The volume notification sound is output at the original volume. By doing so, it becomes easier for the game store clerk or the player to hear the notification sound.

(Volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit)
The volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the volume adjustment processing of the overall control unit 141.

  First, in step T5-1, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment set in the overall RAM 141c is possible (variable). If the volume can be adjusted, the process proceeds to step T5-2. If the volume cannot be adjusted (it is impossible), it is determined that the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 cannot be performed. Move processing to -19.

  In step T5-2, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a security abnormality notification sound having a priority level of “medium” or higher is being output. When the alarm sound of the security abnormality of which the priority is "medium" or more is being output, it is determined that the volume adjustment based on the operation of the cross key 19 cannot be performed, and the process is moved to step T5-19, and the priority is "medium". If the above-mentioned security abnormality notification sound is not being output, the process proceeds to step T5-3.

  In step T5-3, the overall CPU 141a determines whether it is during the volume adjustable period. Specifically, the volume adjustment period is during the customer waiting state and the variation production, and the volume adjustment period is during the light amount adjustment. If it is during the volume adjustable period, the volume is adjusted based on the operation of the cross key 19, and the process proceeds to step T5-4. If not during the volume adjustable period, the cross key 19 is operated. Assuming that the volume adjustment based on it cannot be performed, the process is moved to step T5-19.

  In step T5-4, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the left and right buttons of the cross key 19 have been operated. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an operation signal is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. If the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the process proceeds to step T5-10. If the left or right button of the cross key 19 is not operated, the process proceeds to step T5-5.

  In step T5-5, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the display of special symbols and the special game (big hit game, small hit game) are currently in the waiting state for customers. If it is in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-6, and if it is not in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step T5-15.

  In step T5-6, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not non-display of a volume-based image described later has continued for 5 seconds in the customer waiting state. If the volume-based image has not been displayed for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-7. If the volume-based image has not been displayed for 5 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-8. Transfer.

  The “volume system image” is a volume adjustment guide image for guiding the user that the volume can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19, the current volume value is notified, and the volume is operated by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 19. For example, an image during volume adjustment for guiding that the value is adjusted.

  In step T5-7, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume adjustment guide image in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs the processing for displaying the volume adjustment guide image on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71).

  In step T5-8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 in the customer waiting state has not been operated for 20 minutes. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 20 minutes, the process proceeds to step T5-15 assuming that the previous player has not finished the game, and the cross key 19 is not operated. If it has continued for 20 minutes, then in step T5-9, the current volume value is reset to the initial value of the volume value set in the general RAM 141c, assuming that the previous player has finished the game.

  In step T5-10, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed. If the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-14 to switch to the volume adjusting image. If the volume adjustment guide image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-11. .

  In step T5-11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the volume-adjusted image is being displayed. If the volume-adjusting image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-12 to adjust the volume, and if the volume-adjusting image is not being displayed, the step is performed to display the volume adjustment guide image. The process is transferred to T5-14.

  In step T5-12, the overall CPU 141a performs a volume changing process for changing the volume value. Specifically, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the volume value is subtracted by 1 if the volume value stored in the general RAM 141c is not the lower limit value, and the right button of the cross key 19 is operated. If there is, the volume value is incremented by 1 if it is not the upper limit value of the volume value stored in the overall RAM 141c, and the volume change flag is set in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the presence or absence of the volume change flag is referred to in the voice control process described above, the volume change command is output to the voice control unit 148, and the volume of the effect sound being output is changed.

  In step T5-13, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound pattern of the volume notification sound according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the voice control unit 148 performs a process for outputting the volume notification sound corresponding to the current volume value from the voice output device 9.

  In step T5-14, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation pattern of the volume-adjusted image according to the current volume value in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image controller 145 displays the volume-adjusted image (in place of the volume adjustment guide image when the volume adjustment guide image is being displayed) on the image display device (first image display device 70 or second image display device). The processing for displaying in 71) will be performed. When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

  In step T5-15, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the volume-adjusted image is being displayed. When the volume-adjusted image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-16 to determine whether or not the condition for deleting the volume-adjusted image is satisfied, and the volume-adjusted image is displayed. If it is not in the middle, the current volume adjustment processing is ended.

  In step T5-16, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the effect button 17 has been operated. If the effect button 17 is operated, the process proceeds to step T5-18. If the effect button 17 is not operated, the process proceeds to step T5-17.

  In step T5-17, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the process proceeds to step T5-18. If the cross key 19 has not been operated for 10 seconds, the volume-adjusted image is not erased. This time the volume adjustment processing ends.

  In step T5-18, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume-adjusted image set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the volume-adjusted image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

  In step T5-19, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a volume image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjustment image) is being displayed. If the volume image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step T5-20. If the volume image is not being displayed, the current volume adjustment process is terminated.

  In step T5-20, the overall CPU 141a clears the animation pattern of the volume image (volume adjustment guide image, volume adjustment image) set in the overall RAM 141c. As a result, the image control unit 145 performs processing for deleting the volume-based image displayed on the image display device (the first image display device 70 or the second image display device). When this process ends, the current volume adjustment process ends.

  Although the description of the light amount adjustment process is omitted in the present embodiment, the basic process flow is different from the volume adjustment process in that the notification sound is output after the change of the light amount value. Are the same, the "volume" and "light amount" in the volume adjustment process need only be read differently.

(Specific example when the volume is adjusted while waiting for customers)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed in the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. 67. The basic flow is the same when the light amount is adjusted.

  Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is "2", the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to "2 (volume 40%)" and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the up / down / left / right buttons of the cross key 19 are activated during the effective period for volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, and the first image display device 70 is powered on. "135" which is the initial effect design 70a at the time of throwing in is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

  After that, when the left button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled, and the volume shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted). At this time, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), a volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70.

  When the left button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is decremented by 1 and becomes "1". At this time, as shown in FIG. 67C, the already-displayed volume-adjusted image OG is updated to the volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the subtracted volume value “1”, and the audio output device 9 outputs The volume notification sound “do” corresponding to the volume value “1” is output at a volume of 20% depending (corresponding) to the volume value “1”.

  After that, when the production button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume adjustment) ends and the effective period for the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment comes. At this time, if the volume-adjusted image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased, and if the effect buttons 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 67 (d). , A volume adjustment guide image OAG and a light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed.

  Then, when 30 seconds elapse from the last operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 67 (e), a customer waiting effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 outputs a BGM (customer waiting effect sound) corresponding to the customer waiting effect. Is output.

  As described above, the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) is not changed by operating the cross key 19 when the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) is not displayed. Since the volume value is changed by operating the cross key 19 while being displayed, the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) can be performed after confirming the current volume value (light intensity value), which improves the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible.

(Specific example when volume adjustment is performed during fluctuation production)
A specific example of the case where the volume adjustment is performed during the variation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The basic flow is the same when the light amount is adjusted.

  Here, the switch position (scale) of the changeover switch 22 is "2", the adjustment mode, reference information, and power saving mode settings corresponding to the switch position "2" are set in the general RAM 144, and the volume value is It is assumed that the light amount value is set to "2 (volume 40%)" and the light amount value is set to "3 (light amount 80%)".

  In the customer waiting state, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the up, down, left, and right buttons of the cross key 19 are in effect during the effective period for adjusting the volume and the amount of light, and the first image display device 70 displays. , "135" which is the initial effect design 70a when the power is turned on is displayed, and the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are also displayed.

  After that, when the game ball wins the first starting port 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the variation effect is started. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the first image display device 70, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the sound output device 9 sets the BGM corresponding to the variable effect to the volume value “2”. It is output at a volume of 20% depending on (corresponding to).

  After that, when the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, the up and down buttons of the cross key 19 are disabled, and the volume shifts to a period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume is being adjusted). At this time, as shown in FIG. 68C, a volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the current volume value “2” is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the first image display device 70.

  When the right button of the cross key 19 is operated in this state, the volume value is incremented by 1 to become "3". At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the already-displayed volume-adjusted image OG is updated to the volume-adjusted image OG corresponding to the volume value “3” after addition, and is output from the audio output device 9. The output BGM is output at a volume of 40% depending on (corresponding to) the volume value “3”.

  After that, when the production button 17 and the cross key 19 are not operated for 10 seconds, the period in which the volume can be adjusted (volume adjustment) ends and the effective period for the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment comes. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the volume-adjusted image OG displayed on the first image display device 70 is erased.

  As described above, since the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) can be performed by operating the cross key 19 even while the variation effect is being executed, the convenience of the player is improved, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) is not possible even at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, but at the start of the variable effect or at the end of the variable effect, the volume adjustment (light amount adjustment) is temporarily performed. ) May be disabled. In that case, the volume-adjusted image OG (light-intensity-adjusted image) may be erased, or only the volume adjustment (light-intensity adjustment) may be disabled while the image is displayed.

  In addition, the volume adjustment image OG (light intensity adjustment image) is not displayed even while the variation effect is being executed, and the volume adjustment (light intensity adjustment) is performed without displaying the volume adjustment image OG (light intensity adjustment image). You may make it possible.

(Specific example when settings are changed)
A specific example in which the setting is changed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. 69 (1) to 69 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 69.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, the state confirmation display device 68, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and when it is detected that the setting change operation has been performed at the timing of T3, the setting value is changed (the winning of the game ball). (Detection, error occurrence detection, etc. are not performed) Enter the setting change mode and send the setting change designation command. Also, a setting change signal is output from the security signal terminal, the current set value (any one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113, and the status confirmation display 68 is in a lighting display state.

Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the set value confirmation operation has been performed, an RWM clear designation command and a power-on designation command are transmitted to control the progress of the game (detection of winning of game ball or error). Processes for calculating performance information (normal base value etc. history information) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter are updated) ) To start.
Although illustration is omitted, when the setting change process is completed, RWM clear is performed (see FIG. 19).

  At this time, as described above, the security signal (setting changing signal, RWM clear signal) is continuously output from the security signal terminal, and the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display are displayed. The device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 display an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the indicator is lit) which is a predetermined loss, and the first special symbol is displayed. The holding display 63 and the second special symbol holding display 64 become a display indicating that the number of holdings of special drawing is "0", and the information display 113 starts the operation confirmation display for all blinking of the 7-segment display. . Further, the state confirmation display 68 is in a non-display state (light off).

  After that, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state is detected, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the operation confirmation display execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 is displayed. The performance information (normal base value) of is displayed.

  Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls). The normal medium payout number counter is updated, and the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special symbol hold number "1" is displayed, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth winning designation command Command before change is sent.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 is displayed. Start.

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the variable time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted. At the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state. , Send the customer waiting state designation command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 69 (1) and FIG. 70 (1-a) to FIG. 70 (1-h), the effect control board 130 side in the case of normally receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 The operation example 1 will be described. 70 (1-a) to 70 (1-h) correspond to FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 70 (1-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 70 (1-b)).

  When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change mode for changing the setting is entered and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 70 (1-c)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power-on notification is started by shifting to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in red, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 70 (1-d)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6 is passed. In, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the audio output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design “135”, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 70 (1-e)).

  Then, at the timing of T8, when the red lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started.

  After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 70 (1-f)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 70 (1-g)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 70 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 69 (2) and FIGS. 70 (2-a) to 70 (2-h), the effect control board in the case where the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 2 on the side of 130 will be described. 70 (2-a) to 70 (2-h) correspond to each of FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (h).

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 70 (2-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 70 (2-b)).

  When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change mode for making the setting change notification is entered and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 70 (2-c)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power-on notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting change screen (see FIG. 70 (2-d)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 70 (2-e)).

  Then, at the timing T9 after passing the timings T6 to T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of reserved 1st special figures is updated. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 70 (2-f)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 70 (2-g)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 70 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, by using FIG. 69 (3) and FIGS. 70 (3-a) to 70 (3-h), the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 are normally received. An operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 in the case where it is not possible will be described. 70 (3-a) to 70 (3-h) correspond to FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 70 (3-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 70 (3-b)).

  When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change mode for making the setting change notification is entered and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 70 (3-c)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should otherwise be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (3-d)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue the setting change mode without doing anything. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (3-e)).

  When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designating command is issued. When normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light amount can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 70 (3-f)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 70 (3-g)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 70 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, referring to FIG. 69 (4) and FIGS. 70 (4-a) to 70 (4-h), the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. An operation example 4 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the figure variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally will be described. 70 (4-a) to 70 (4-h) correspond to FIG. 69 (a) to FIG. 69 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 70 (4-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 70 (4-b)).

  When the setting change designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting change mode for making the setting change notification is entered and the setting change notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, on the first image display device 70, a setting change screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed (see FIG. 70 (4-c)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the power-on notification that should otherwise be executed is not executed. Continue the setting change mode. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (4-d)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue the setting change mode without doing anything. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (4-e)).

  When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated, but the setting change mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designating command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting change mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designating command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect, which should otherwise be performed, is not executed and the setting change mode is continued. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (4-f)).

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting change mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting change screen continues (see FIG. 70 (4-g)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like in the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 70 (4-h)).

  In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game store staff can be extended, and the convenience of the game store side can be improved.

  In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the setting change mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command that significantly changes the display image of the first image display device 70). When the setting is normally received, the setting change mode (setting change screen) is ended and the effect progress mode (normal screen) is entered, so the mode should be changed in accordance with the effect control change by the effect control board 130. Is possible.

  In addition, at the timing of shifting from the setting change mode (setting change screen) to the production progress mode (production screen), the volume (or player) can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). Therefore, it is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount while actually confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the first image display device 70, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening). 45, the second start opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, the second big winning opening 53), when the game ball wins, this win is invalid and the payout of the game ball is not performed, Since the number of payouts corresponding thereto is not collected and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, only when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the first image display device 70, if a game ball flows into the outlet 39, This inflow becomes invalid, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not subject to calculation of the normal base value. It is possible to calculate, store, and display performance information (history information) of the gaming machine only when the game can be executed, and it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting changing screen on the first image display device 70 is displayed. When a game ball is won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) when is displayed The payout of game balls is made valid with this winning, and the number of payouts corresponding to this winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 becomes the target of calculation of the normal base value. As it may change, performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even if it is not in the game progression mode (production progression mode) in appearance. To provide It can become.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting changing screen on the first image display device 70 is displayed. If a game ball flows into the out port 39 when is displayed, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and becomes the target for calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value displayed on 113 may change, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even when not in the game progression mode (production progression mode). Therefore, it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing) and the setting change screen is displayed on the first image display device 70, various error determinations are executed (error designation command is transmitted. If the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (production screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, Since various error judgments are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification becomes executable, it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting change process. It is not necessary to perform useless processing, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting change screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. When displayed, various error determinations are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so even if it is not in the game progress mode (production progress mode) in appearance. It is possible to accurately notify the occurrence of an error. In this case, the display of the setting change screen may be terminated by shifting to the effect progress mode, or the display of the setting change screen may be maintained without changing to the effect progress mode.

  Note that when the setting change mode (setting change screen) is shifted to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power-on notification is executed, the operation of the cross key 19 (player) to adjust the volume and the light amount ( Instead of enabling the setting, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound ends. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely finished.

  Also, during the setting change mode, even if the special symbol storage designation command or the starting mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol storage designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing which received the oral winning award designation command normally.

  Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting change mode, it is not prevented from shifting to the effect progress mode, but may be shifted to the effect progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good. Note that the symbol determination command may include information indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination, and in this case, an effect symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (for example, "777" for a big hit, "246" for a loss, etc.). ) Is not displayed, but it is good to display the common initial effect symbol "135" when the power is ON (low-probability non-time saving game state).

  Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) that is transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen) ) Is not displayed (variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting change mode is continued and the setting change screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

  Further, although the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the setting change notification are different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 in the power-on notification, the same light emission is performed. It may be a color.

  Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting change mode (setting change processing), various error determinations (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are executed. In this case, even if various errors occur and an error designation command is transmitted, the setting change notification is maintained and the error notification is restricted (restricted) in the first image display device 70. It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification to be lower (lower) than the setting change notification.

(Specific example when RWM clear is performed)
A specific example in which the RWM clear is performed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. 71 (1) to 71 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the side of the effect control board 130.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display device 64, the normal symbol hold display device 65, the state confirmation display device 68, and the information display device 113 are in a non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and when it is detected that the RWM clear operation is performed at the timing of T3, a predetermined area of the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is initialized. In order to do so (the winning detection of the game ball and the occurrence of an error are not detected) RWM clear processing is performed.

  Then, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear is completed, the RWM clear designation command and the power-on designation command are transmitted to control the progress of the game (the winning detection of the game ball, the occurrence of an error, etc. are detected). The process proceeds to the game progress mode, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter) is started.

  At this time, the RWM clear signal (security signal) is output from the security signal terminal for a predetermined period, and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 are predetermined. Display the initial symbol (for example, one of a plurality of LEDs that make up the display is lit) that is a missing item, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63, the second special symbol reservation indicator 64, and the ordinary The symbol reservation display 65 becomes a display indicating that the special figure reservation number is “0”, and the information display 113 starts an operation confirmation display in which the 7-segment display is all blinked.

  After that, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state is detected, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the operation confirmation display execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 is displayed. The performance information (normal base value) of is displayed.

  Next, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls). The normal medium payout number counter is updated, and the display indicating that the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is the first special symbol hold number "1" is displayed, and the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth winning designation command Command before change is sent.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 is displayed. Start.

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the variable time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60, and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted. At the timing of T12, when it is detected that the customer is in the waiting state. , Send the customer waiting state designation command.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, referring to FIG. 71 (1) and FIG. 72 (1-a) to FIG. 72 (1-g), the effect control board 130 side in the case of normally receiving the command transmitted from the main control board 110 The operation example 1 will be described. Note that FIGS. 72 (1-a) to 72 (1-g) correspond to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (g), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a non-display state (see FIG. 72 (1-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 72 (1-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear processing is completed, when the power-on designation command (RWM clear designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production. Power-on notification is started. At this time, a power-on notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in red, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 72 (1-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power-on notification is continued, and the timing of T7 after the timing of T6 is passed. In, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power-on notification sound elapses, the audio output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design “135”, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 72 (1-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T8, when the red lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power-on notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started.

  After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 72 (1-e)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 72 (1-f)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 72 (1-g)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 71 (2) and FIGS. 72 (2-a) to 72 (2-g), the effect control board when the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally An operation example 2 on the side of 130 will be described. Note that FIGS. 72 (2-a) to 72 (2-g) correspond to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (g), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 72 (2-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 72 (2-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear processing ends, if a power-on designation command (RWM clear designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, it is normally executed. The power-on notification that should have been issued will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs continues with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (2-c)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), The background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed (see FIG. 72 (2-d)).

  Then, at the timing T9 after passing the timings T6 to T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of reserved 1st special figures is updated. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 72 (2-e)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 72 (2-f)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 72 (2-g)).

(Operation example 3 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 71 (3) and FIGS. 72 (3-a) to 72 (3-g), the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 are normally received. An operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 in the case where it is not possible will be described. 72 (3-a) to 72 (3-g) correspond to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (g), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 72 (3-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 72 (3-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear processing is completed, the power-on designation command (RWM clear designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs. If so, the power-on notification that should have been executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, on the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is continuously displayed along with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (3-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which would otherwise be the case, should not be entered. It will be. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of the various ROMs is continuously displayed together with the seven-color bar as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (3-d)).

  When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs continues to be displayed, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is not started, and then the special figure variation pattern designation command is normally received, The control proceeds to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light amount can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 72 (3-e)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 72 (3-f)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 72 (3-g)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, referring to FIG. 71 (4) and FIGS. 72 (4-a) to 72 (4-g), the power-on designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special command transmitted from the main control board 110 will be described. An operation example 4 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the figure variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally will be described. 72 (4-a) to 72 (4-g) correspond to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (g), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state (see FIG. 72 (4-a)).

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 72 (4-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the RWM clear processing is completed, the power-on designation command (RWM clear designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally and a reception error occurs. If so, the power-on notification that should have been executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is continuously displayed together with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (4-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which would otherwise be the case, should not be entered. It will be. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70, the version bar indicating the contents of various ROMs is continuously displayed together with the seven-color bar as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (4-d)).

  When the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T9 after the timing of T6 to T8, the sub RAM 130c receives the command. The stored first special figure reservation number is updated. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs continues to be displayed, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is not started, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received. If the reception error occurs without being able to perform, the variation effect that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 continue to be turned off. Then, in the first image display device 70, with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen, the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs continues (see FIG. 72 (4-e)).

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect which should otherwise be derived is not derived. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs continues with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 72 (4-f)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), A background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 72 (4-g)).

  In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game store staff can be extended, and the convenience of the game store side can be improved.

  Further, with the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen, at the timing when the display of the version information showing the contents of various ROMs is shifted to the initial symbol display (normal screen), the volume and the light amount of the volume and light amount by the operation of the cross key 19 (player) Since the adjustment (setting) is possible, the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) while actually confirming the effect, and it becomes possible for the player to perform the adjustment function.

  Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clearing process and the first image display device 70 displays the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen and the version information display showing the contents of various ROMs is displayed, various prizes are won. When the game ball wins the mouth (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53), this winning is invalid. Since the payout of gaming balls is not performed, the number of payouts corresponding to this winning is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not included in the calculation of the normal base value. The performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when the player can execute the game, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clearing process and the first image display device 70 displays the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen and the display of the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs, the output port is displayed. When a game ball flows into 39, this inflow is invalidated, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113 without being included in the calculation of the normal base value. Since the value does not change, performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed only when the player can execute the game, and accurate performance information can be provided. Becomes

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the first image display device 70 displays an initial screen 7 When the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of each color, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50). When a game ball is won in the second big winning opening 53), the prize is valid and the game balls are paid out, and the number of payouts corresponding to the prize is collected to calculate the normal base value. Since the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 as a target may change, the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately obtained even if it is not in the game progress mode (production progress mode) in appearance. ) Can be calculated and stored and displayed, it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the first image display device 70 displays an initial screen 7 When a game ball flows into the out port 39 when the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of the color, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is obtained. Since the normal base value that is collected and calculated as the normal base value and displayed on the information display 113 may change, it is appropriate even if it is not in the game progression mode (production progression mode). The performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clearing process and the first image display device 70 displays the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen and the display of the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs, Error determination is not executed (error specification command is transmitted), error notification is not executed, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control), and the normal screen (on the first image display device 70) When the production screen) is displayed, various error determinations are executed (error specification commands are transmitted) and error notification becomes executable, so a game or cheating by the player that RWM clear processing is in progress It is not necessary to perform unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the processing will be performed, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power-on designation command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the first image display device 70 has an initial screen of seven colors. When the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of, various error determinations are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so the game progresses visually. Even when the mode (production progress mode) is not set, it is possible to accurately notify the occurrence of an error. In this case, the display of the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs may be ended together with the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen by shifting to the production progress mode, or 7 may be displayed as the initial screen without shifting to the production progress mode. Along with the color bar of the color, the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs may be maintained.

  It should be noted that when the RWM clear processing is shifted to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power-on notification is executed, the volume (or player) can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 (player). Alternatively, the volume or light amount may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power-on notification sound is completed, or the timing when the power-on notification is completely completed. Alternatively, the volume or light amount may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19.

  Also, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing which received the oral winning award designation command normally.

  Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but may be shifted to the production progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

  Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) that is transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen) ) Is not displayed (variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the display of the version information showing the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

  In addition, various error determinations (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) may be executed while the main control board 110 side is in the RWM clearing process. Even if various errors occur and the error designation command is transmitted, the first image display device 70 maintains the display of version information indicating the contents of various ROMs with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen. In order to restrict (limit) error notification, the priority of error notification (importance) is set lower (lower) than the display of version information showing the contents of various ROMs with a color bar of 7 colors as the initial screen. It is good to do it.

(Specific example when the control state of the game is restored)
A specific example of the case where the control state of the game is restored without confirming the setting when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. 73 (1) to 73 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, it is assumed that the low-probability non-time saving game state (normal game state) is restored.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display unit 64, the normal symbol hold display unit 65, the state confirmation display unit 68, and the information display unit 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, the startup waiting process ends and shifts to the startup process, and at the timing of T3, when it is detected that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation are not performed, the power supply is turned on. Process for transmitting performance information (history information such as normal base value) to control the progress of the game by sending a recovery designation command (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter) , Update of the normal out counter) is started.

  At this time, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and the normal symbol display device 62 have an initial symbol that is a predetermined loss (for example, a plurality of symbols constituting the display device). One of the LEDs is lit) is displayed, and the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the second special symbol hold indicator 64, and the normal symbol hold indicator 65 are special figure hold number "0" Is displayed, and the information display 113 starts the operation confirmation of all blinking of the 7-segment display.

  Then, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state is detected, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and when the operation confirmation execution time (5 seconds) elapses at the timing of T5, the performance of the information display 113 is increased. Start displaying information (usually base value).

  After that, at the timing of T8 after the timing of T6 to T7, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the payout device 95 pays out the prize ball (three game balls) and the normal. The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", such as the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth prize designation command. Send the pre-fluctuation command.

  Next, at the timing of T9, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 is displayed. Start.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 and the symbol confirmation command is transmitted. At the timing of T11, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, referring to FIG. 73 (1) and FIGS. 74 (1-a) to 74 (1-h), the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received. The operation example 1 will be described. 74 (1-a) to 74 (1-h) correspond to FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 74 (1-a)).

  Then, at the timing of T3, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power supply restoration notification is started by shifting to the production progress mode for performing the game production. At this time, the power output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in blue, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, on the first image display device 70, an initial production symbol "135" common to the power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game) when shifting to a normal screen (production screen). State), a background image and the like of the common effect mode A are displayed (see FIG. 74 (1-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power restoration notification is continued. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in blue continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design and the background image continues (see FIG. 74 (1-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (see FIG. 74 (1-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T7, when the lighting time (60 seconds) in blue of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (see FIG. 74 (1-e)).

  After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 74 (1-f)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T10, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 74 (1-g)).

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 74 (1-h)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 73 (2) and FIGS. 74 (2-a) to 74 (2-h), the effect control board in the case where the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received. An operation example 2 on the side of 130 will be described. 74 (2-a) to 74 (2-h) correspond to FIGS. 73 (a) to 73 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 74 (2-a)).

  Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. . Then, on the first image display device 70, the color bar of seven colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (2-b)).

  After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T4, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 74 (2-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T6 after the timing of T5, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (FIG. 74 (2-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T7, when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the demo lighting for the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to attract the interest of the player is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 74 (2-e). )reference).

  After that, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c Update the number and finish the customer waiting production. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect design "135", the background image, and the like to additionally display the first hold icon.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started (see FIG. 74 (2-f)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T10, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, on the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 74 (2-g)).

  When the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 74 (2-h)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, using FIG. 73 (3) and FIGS. 74 (3-a) to 74 (3-h), the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 are normally received. An operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 in the case where it is not possible will be described. 74 (3-a) to 74 (3-h) correspond to FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 74 (3-a)).

  Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. . Then, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (3-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which would otherwise be the case, should not be entered. The command waiting state continues. Then, on the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (3-c)).

  Then, at the timing of T5 to T7, since no command is received from the main control board 110, the command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of seven colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIGS. 74 (3-d) and 74 (3-e)).

  Next, at the timing of T8, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. The pending number is updated, but the command waiting state continues. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. When normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the voice output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and the cross key 19 is operated. The volume and light amount can be adjusted (set). Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 74 (3-f)).

  After that, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 74 (3-g)).

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 74 (3-h)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (4) and FIGS. 74 (4-a) to 74 (4-h), the power supply restoration designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special command transmitted from the main control board 110. An operation example 4 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the figure variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally will be described. 74 (4-a) to 74 (4-h) correspond to FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (h), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 74 (4-a)).

  Then, at the timing of T3, if a reception error occurs in which the power restoration specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power restoration notification, which should otherwise be executed, is not executed. . Then, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (4-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, the customer waiting state, which would otherwise be the case, should not be entered. The command waiting state continues. Then, on the first image display device 70, the color bar of seven colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (4-c)).

  Next, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T8 after the timing of T5 to T7, the sub RAM 130c. The first special figure reservation number stored in is updated, but the command waiting state is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T9, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect which would otherwise be executed is not executed and the command waiting state is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (4-f)).

  After that, at the timing of T10, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the command waiting state is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. Then, in the first image display device 70, the color bar of 7 colors and the version information are continuously displayed as the initial screen (see FIG. 74 (4-g)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ), A background image of the common effect mode A and the like are displayed (see FIG. 74 (4-h)).

  In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game store staff can be extended, and the convenience of the game store side can be improved.

  In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the command waiting state, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command that significantly changes the display image of the first image display device 70). When the command is normally received, the command waiting state (initial screen) ends and the production progress mode (normal screen) is entered, so it is possible to perform mode transition according to changes in the production control by the production control board 130. Becomes

  Also, at the timing of shifting from the command waiting state (initial screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). It is possible to adjust (set) the volume and the light amount while confirming the effect, and it is possible to provide an adjustment function that is kind to the player.

  Note that, when the command progressing state (initial screen) is shifted to the production progress mode (normal screen), even if the power restoration notification is executed, the operation of the cross key 19 (player) adjusts (sets) the volume and light amount. The power recovery notification sound may be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the power recovery notification sound is output. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the process ends.

  Also, even if the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as a command before change is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but a special symbol memory designation command or start. You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing which received the oral winning award designation command normally.

  Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the command waiting state, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but may be shifted to the production progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

(Specific example when setting is confirmed)
A specific example in which the setting is confirmed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. 75 (1) to 75 (4) are diagrams showing four operation examples on the effect control board 130 side. Here, after confirming the setting, it is assumed that the low-probability non-time saving game state (normal game state) is restored.

(Operation example on the main control board side)
First, an operation example on the main control board 110 side will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the waiting process for starting the other boards is performed. At this time, the signal output from the security signal terminal is not performed, the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, the normal symbol display device 62, the first special symbol hold display device 63, the second special symbol hold The display unit 64, the normal symbol hold display unit 65, the state confirmation display unit 68, and the information display unit 113 are in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, the activation waiting process ends and shifts to the activation process, and when it is detected that the setting confirmation operation is performed at the timing of T3, the setting value saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c is detected. The mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode for confirming, and the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted. Further, a setting confirmation signal is output from the security signal terminal, the current setting value (any one of 1 to 4) is displayed on the information display 113, and the state confirmation display 68 is lit up.

  Then, at the timing of T4, when it is detected that the confirmation end operation is performed, a power supply restoration designation command is transmitted to control the progress of the game (the winning detection of the game ball, the occurrence detection of an error, etc. are performed. ) The process proceeds to the game progress mode, and the process for calculating the performance information (history information such as the normal base value) (normal medium payout number counter, total out number counter, normal medium out number counter is updated) is started. Further, the state confirmation display 68 is in a non-display state (light off).

  At this time, from the security signal terminal, as described above, the security signal (setting confirmation signal) is continuously output for a predetermined time, and the first special symbol display device 60, the second special symbol display device 61, and , Ordinary symbol display 62 displays an initial symbol (for example, a state in which one of a plurality of LEDs constituting the display is lit) that is a predetermined loss, and the first special symbol hold display 63 And the second special symbol reservation display 64 becomes a display showing that the special figure reservation number is “0”, and the information display 113 starts the operation confirmation display for all blinking of the 7-segment display.

  After that, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state is detected, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, and at the timing of T6, when the operation confirmation display execution time (5 seconds) elapses, the information display 113 is displayed. The performance information (normal base value) of is displayed.

  After that, at the timing of T9 after the timing of T7 to T8, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45 is detected, the prize device (3 game balls) is paid out from the payout device 95 normally. The medium payout number counter is updated, and the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "1", such as the first special symbol memory designation command and the first starting mouth prize designation command. Send the pre-fluctuation command.

  Next, at the timing of T10, when the first special symbol reservation number is subtracted, the first special symbol reservation indicator 63 becomes a display indicating that the first special symbol reservation number is "0", and the special display is stopped. After determining the symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the variation start command such as the special symbol designation command or the special symbol variation pattern designation command is transmitted, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 is displayed. Start.

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the variation time has elapsed, the lost special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 to determine the symbol confirmation command, and at the timing of T12, it is detected that the customer is waiting. Then, the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted.

(Operation example 1 on the production control board side)
Next, referring to FIG. 75 (1) and FIGS. 76 (1-a) to 76 (1-i), the effect control board 130 side when the command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received The operation example 1 will be described. 76 (1-a) to 76 (1-i) correspond to FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 76 (1-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 76 (1-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, when the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the power supply restoration notification is started by shifting to the production progress mode for performing the game production. At this time, the power output notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are lit in white, and the volume and light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, on the first image display device 70, an initial production symbol "135" common to the power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game) when shifting to a normal screen (production screen). State), a background image and the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 76 (1-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the customer wait state is entered, but the power restoration notification is continued. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the initial effect design and the background image continues (see FIG. 76 (1-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, when the output time (30 seconds) of the power restoration notification sound elapses, the output of the audio from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, the first image display device 70 is in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image (see FIG. 76 (1-e)).

  After that, at the timing of T8, when the white lighting time (60 seconds) of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 elapses, the power restoration notification ends. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the state in which the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image continues (see FIG. 76 (1-f)).

  Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. Update the number of holds. Then, the first image display device 70 additionally displays the first hold icon.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 76 (1-g)).

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 76 (1-h)).

  After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image and the like continues (see FIG. 76 (1-i)).

(Operation example 2 on the production control board side)
Next, using FIG. 75 (2) and FIGS. 76 (2-a) to 76 (2-i), the effect control board in the case where the power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be received normally An operation example 2 on the side of 130 will be described. 76 (2-a) to 76 (2-i) correspond to FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 76 (2-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 76 (2-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (2-c)).

  Next, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T5, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like of the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 76 (2-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T7 after the timing of T6, in the first image display device 70, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in addition to the initial effect design and the background image ( See FIG. 76 (2-e)).

  After that, at the timing of T8, when the waiting time of the customer waiting effect elapses, the customer waiting effect is started. At this time, the demo BGM is output from the audio output device 9, and the demo lighting for the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 to attract the interest of the player is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the demonstration display effect for attracting the interest of the player is started in a state where the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the light amount adjustment guide image KAG are displayed (FIG. 76 (2-f)). )reference).

  Next, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure stored in the sub RAM 130c. The number of holdings is updated and the customer waiting production is ended. At this time, the first image display device 70 displays the initial effect design "135", the background image, and the like to additionally display the first hold icon.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol variation pattern designation command is normally received after the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the variation effect is started. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon is changed to the icon and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 76 (2-g)).

  Then, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 76 (2-h)).

  After that, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 76 (2-i)).

(Operation example 3 of production control board)
Next, using FIG. 75 (3) and FIGS. 76 (3-a) to 76 (3-i), the power-on designation command and the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 are normally received. An operation example 3 on the side of the effect control board 130 in the case where it is not possible will be described. 76 (3-a) to 76 (3-i) correspond to FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by operating the selector switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with a color bar of seven colors as an initial screen (see FIG. 76 (3-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 76 (3-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (3-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue setting confirmation mode without doing anything. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (3-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIGS. 76 (3-e) to 76 (3-f)).

  After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c The number is updated, but the setting confirmation mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command. When is normally received, it shifts to the effect progress mode for performing the game effect and starts the variable effect. At this time, the BGM of the fluctuating effect is output from the audio output device 9, and the fancy decoration light emission for decorating the fluctuating effect is started in the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, the background image of the common effect mode A or the like is displayed, and the variable display of the effect design 70a is started (see FIG. 76 (3-g)).

  Next, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the result of the variation effect is derived. At this time, the background effect BGM output from the audio output device 9 is stopped. Then, in the first image display device 70, the lost effect design 70a that has been temporarily stopped after the variable display is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 76 (3-h)).

  Then, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T12, the customer waiting state is entered. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission that makes it easy to recognize the customer waiting state is started. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the lost effect design 70a, the background image, and the like continues (see FIG. 76 (3-i)).

(Operation example 4 on the production control board side)
Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (4) and FIGS. 76 (4-a) to 76 (4-i), the power supply restoration designation command, the customer waiting state designation command, and the special command transmitted from the main control board 110. An operation example 4 on the side of the effect control board 130 when the figure variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally will be described. 76 (4-a) to 76 (4-i) correspond to FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (i), respectively.

  First, at the timing of T1, when the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the starting process is performed. At this time, no sound is output from the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are turned off, and the adjustment mode is switched by the operation of the changeover switch 22 (setting of the initial volume value), In addition, the volume (volume) and the amount of light (adjustment) cannot be adjusted by operating the cross key 19. Then, the first image display device 70 is in the non-display state.

  Next, at the timing of T2, when the activation process is completed, a command waiting state for receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 110 is entered. At this time, the adjustment mode (setting of the initial volume value) can be switched by operating the changeover switch 22. Then, on the first image display device 70, the version information indicating the contents of various ROMs is displayed together with the color bar of seven colors as the initial screen (see FIG. 76 (4-a)).

  Then, when the setting confirmation designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received at the timing of T3, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting is entered and the setting confirmation notification is started. At this time, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are lit in white. Then, the setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 76 (4-b)).

  After that, at the timing of T4, if a reception error occurs in which the power recovery designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received, the power recovery notification that should otherwise be executed will not be executed. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, lighting in white continues. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (4-c)).

  Next, at the timing of T5, if the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 cannot be normally received and a reception error occurs, shift to the customer waiting state which is supposed to shift. Continue setting confirmation mode without doing anything. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (4-d)).

  Then, at the timing of T6 to T8, since no command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIGS. 76 (4-e) to 76 (4-f)).

  After that, at the timing of T9, when the pre-variation command such as the first special symbol storage designation command or the first starting mouth winning designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first special figure hold stored in the sub RAM 130c The number is updated, but the setting confirmation mode is continued. Therefore, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues, and the additional display of the first hold icon is not performed.

  Then, at the timing of T10, when the special symbol designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without starting the variation effect, and then the special symbol variation pattern designation command is issued. If the reception cannot be performed normally and a reception error occurs, the variation effect, which should otherwise be performed, is not executed and the setting confirmation mode is continued. Then, in the first image display device 70, the display of the setting confirmation screen continues (see FIG. 76 (4-g)).

  Next, at the timing of T11, when the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is normally received, the setting confirmation mode is continued without deriving the result of the fluctuating effect which should otherwise be derived. Then, the first image display device 70 continues to display the setting confirmation screen (see FIG. 76 (4-h)).

  Then, at the timing of T12, when the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, it shifts to the production progress mode for performing the game production and enters the customer waiting state. At this time, in the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the customer waiting decorative light emission, which makes it easy to recognize that the customer is waiting, is started, and the volume and the light amount can be adjusted (set) by operating the cross key 19. It will be in a state. Then, the first image display device 70 shifts to a normal screen (production screen) and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state) common initial production symbol "135" and power-on (low-probability non-time saving game state). ) At the same time, a background image or the like in the common effect mode A is displayed (see FIG. 76 (4-i)).

  In this way, the adjustment control mode can be switched (the volume initial value can be set) by the operation of the changeover switch 22 from the state where the effect control board 130 is in the command waiting state immediately after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. Therefore, the period during which the volume can be adjusted by the game store staff can be extended, and the convenience of the game store side can be improved.

  In addition, after the production control board 130 side shifts to the setting confirmation mode, a new command (a specific command for shifting to the production progress mode, that is, a command that significantly changes the display image of the first image display device 70). When the setting is normally received, the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) ends and shifts to the production progress mode (normal screen). Therefore, the mode transition should be performed according to the change in the production control by the production control board 130. Is possible.

  Also, at the timing of shifting from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) to the production progress mode (normal screen), the volume (or player) can be adjusted (set) by the operation of the cross key 19 (player). The volume and the amount of light can be adjusted (set) while actually confirming the production, and the adjustment function that is kind to the player can be realized.

  Further, when the main control board 110 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the first image display device 70, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening). 45, the second start opening 47, the first big winning opening 50, the second big winning opening 53), when the game ball wins, this win is invalid and the payout of the game ball is not performed, Since the number of payouts corresponding thereto is not collected and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is excluded from the calculation of the normal base value, only when the player can execute the game. Performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be calculated, stored, and displayed, and accurate performance information can be provided.

  Further, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the first image display device 70, if a game ball flows into the outlet 39, This inflow becomes invalid, the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is not collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 does not change because it is not subject to calculation of the normal base value. It is possible to calculate, store, and display performance information (history information) of the gaming machine only when the game can be executed, and it is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 cannot normally receive the power restoration specification command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting confirmation screen on the first image display device 70 is displayed. When a game ball is won in various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first big winning opening 50, second big winning opening 53) when is displayed The payout of game balls is made valid with this winning, and the number of payouts corresponding to this winning is collected, and the normal base value displayed on the information display 113 becomes the target of calculation of the normal base value. As it may change, performance information (history information) of the gaming machine can be accurately calculated, stored, and displayed even if it is not in the game progression mode (production progression mode) in appearance. To provide It can become.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 could not normally receive the power restoration designating command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. When a game ball flows into the out port 39 while being displayed, this inflow becomes effective, and the number of outs corresponding to this inflow is collected and becomes the target for calculation of the normal base value. Since the normal base value displayed in may change, it is possible to accurately calculate, store, and display the performance information (history information) of the gaming machine even if it is not in the game proceeding mode (production proceeding mode). It is possible to provide accurate performance information.

  Further, when the main control board 110 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the image display device, various error determinations are not executed (error specification command is not transmitted). When the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the normal screen (production screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70, various kinds of errors are not displayed. Error determination is executed (error specification command is sent) and error notification becomes executable, so it is a wasteful process in situations where it is difficult to assume that a game or fraudulent activity will be performed by the player during the setting confirmation process. It is possible to reduce the processing load without performing the above.

  In addition, because the production control board 130 could not normally receive the power restoration designating command, the main control board 110 side is in the game progress mode (game progress control) and the setting confirmation screen is displayed on the first image display device 70. When displayed, various error determinations are executed (error specification command is transmitted) and error notification is executed, so even if it is not in the game progress mode (production progress mode) in appearance. It is possible to accurately notify the occurrence of an error. In this case, the display of the setting confirmation screen may be ended by shifting to the production progress mode, or the display of the setting confirmation screen may be maintained without shifting to the production progress mode.

  Note that when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation screen) is shifted to the effect progress mode (normal screen), even if the power restoration notification is executed, the operation of the cross key 19 (player) to adjust the volume and the light amount ( It is also possible to adjust the volume or light amount by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when the output of the power restoration notification sound is finished (setting), instead of enabling the setting. It may be possible to adjust (set) the volume and the amount of light by operating the cross key 19 at the timing when is completely finished.

  Also, during the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol memory designation command or the start mouth winning designation command as the command before change is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode even if it is normally received, but the special symbol memory designation command or start You may make it shift to production progress mode at the timing which received the oral winning award designation command normally.

  Further, even if the symbol confirmation command is normally received during the setting confirmation mode, it is not prevented from shifting to the production progress mode, but may be shifted to the production progress mode at the timing when the symbol confirmation command is normally received. Good.

  Also, when the variation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) that is transmitted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is normally received, it shifts to the production progress mode and the normal screen (production screen) ) Is not displayed (the variation effect is started), the variation display of the special symbol may be performed while the setting confirmation mode is continued and the setting confirmation screen is displayed. In this case, by normally receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the opening designation command next, it is preferable to shift to the production progress mode and display the normal screen (production screen).

  Further, although the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the setting confirmation notification are different from the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device in the power restoration notification, they are the same emission color. Good.

  Also, when the main control board 110 side is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation processing), various error determinations (abnormal winning error, illegal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error) are executed. In such a case, even if various errors occur and the error designation command is transmitted, the setting confirmation notification is maintained and the error notification is restricted (restricted) in the first image display device 70. It is preferable to set the priority (importance) of the error notification to be lower (lower) than the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the RWM clear processing (FIG. 69, FIG. 71, FIG. 75), the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the RWM. When the clear processing ends, the information display 113 displays the operation confirmation display and then displays the base value, and when the power is turned on without the setting change processing, the setting confirmation processing, and the RWM clear processing ( In FIG. 73), when the power is turned on, the information display unit 113 displays the base value after performing the operation confirmation display after the activation wait or the activation processing period has elapsed. That is, the time from the completion of the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process when the power is turned on with the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process until the base value is displayed on the information display 113. Is shorter than the time from power-on when the power is turned on without setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, and RWM clear processing to the display of the base value of the information display 113. By doing so, when the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed, the amusement shop staff is operating the information display 113, and it is highly necessary to confirm the operation of the information display 113. By promptly displaying the operation confirmation, it is possible for the game shop staff to confirm the operation promptly.

(Specific example of initial operation)
A specific example of the initial operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78.
Although some of the initial operations are omitted in FIGS. 69 to 76, when the power is turned on, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73a, the second movable member 73b, and the board. The illumination device 74 and the like perform a predetermined operation (hereinafter, referred to as "initial operation").

(Specific example of initial operation when power is turned on with clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation when the power is turned on with the RWM clear will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In addition, turning on the power with RWM clear includes RWM clear with setting change and RWM clear without setting change.

First, when the power is turned on with the RWM clear, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the power-on notification is executed, and the first image display device 70 displays the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at power-on. The pattern "135") is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). ) Is output.
Although the illustration of the frame lighting device 10 and the like is omitted in FIG. 77, it is assumed that the frame lighting device 10 is lit in red.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the initial operation is started, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided. The board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs is lit in red.

  As described above, the initial operation when the power is turned on with the RWM clear is performed during the power-on notification. That is, the initial operation is not performed when the setting is changed before the power-on notification. By doing so, since the movable members (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b) do not operate during the operation of changing the setting by the game shop staff, the movable member (first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b) that is moving (first It is possible to prevent contact with the movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b).

Further, the common initial operation is performed in the case of RWM clear accompanied by the setting change and in the case of RWM clear not accompanied by the setting change. In this way, since the initial operation is common, the processing load on the main controller 110m (main CPU 110a) and the effect controller 130m (sub CPU 130a) can be reduced.
Note that the timing from when the power is turned on to when the initial operation is executed is different between the case of RWM clear accompanied by setting change and the case of RWM clear not accompanied by setting change. In other words, in the case of RWM clear with setting change, the timing from turning on the power for the time during which the setting change is executed until the initial operation is executed is more than that of RWM clear without setting change. It's late.

(Specific example of initial operation when power is turned on without clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation when the power is turned on without clearing the RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 78. The power ON without RWM clear includes power ON with setting confirmation and power ON without setting confirmation.

First, when the power is turned on without clearing the RWM, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the power restoration notification is executed, and in the image display device 70, the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial effect design) "135") is displayed, and the sound output device 9 outputs a power recovery notification sound ("power is restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power is recovered (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). ) Is output.
Although the frame lighting device 10 and the like are omitted in FIG. 78, the frame lighting device 10 is assumed to be lit in blue.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the initial operation is started, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b move, and the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided. The board lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs is lit in blue.

  As described above, the initial operation when the power is turned on without clearing the RWM is performed during the power recovery notification. That is, in the setting confirmation performed before the power restoration notification, the initial operation is not performed. By doing so, since the movable members (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b) do not operate during the work of the setting confirmation by the game store staff, the movable member (the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b) that is moving (first It is possible to prevent contact with the movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b).

Further, the common initial operation is performed when the power is turned on with confirmation of the setting and when the power is turned on without confirmation of the setting. In this way, since the initial operation is common, the processing load on the main controller 110m (main CPU 110a) and the effect controller 130m (sub CPU 130a) can be reduced.
The timing from when the power is turned on to when the initial operation is executed is different between the case where the power is turned on with the setting confirmation and the case where the power is turned on without the setting confirmation. In other words, in the case where the power is turned on with the setting confirmation, as compared with the case where the power is turned on without the setting confirmation, the time from when the power is turned on until the initial operation is executed is longer than the time when the setting confirmation is executed Timing is late.

  As described above, the initial operation is different when the power is turned on with RWM clear and when the power is turned on without RWM clear (specifically, the frame lighting device). It is possible to recognize whether or not the RWM clear has been performed depending on 10 and the emission color of the panel lighting device 74) and the type of initial operation.

  In the present embodiment, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b as initial operations are performed when the power is turned on with the RWM clear and when the power is turned on without the RWM clear. However, in addition to the emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may have different movable modes. The emission colors of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 may be the same, and only the movable mode of the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may be different. Further, instead of the emission color, the emission pattern (blinking, lighting) may be different, or the emission color and the emission pattern may be different.

Also, although the initial operation is common between the RWM clear with the setting change and the RWM clear without the setting change, the initial operation is different between the RWM clear with the setting change and the RWM clear without the setting change. May be. By doing so, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the setting has been changed, depending on the type of the initial operation. Similarly, when the power is turned on with confirmation of the setting, the initial operation may be different from that when another power is turned on.
Also in these cases, the initial operation of changing only the light emission color of the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 or the initial operation of changing only the light emission pattern may be performed, or the first movable member 73a and the first movable member 73a. The initial operation in which only the movable mode of the 2-movable member 73b is changed may be performed, or the initial operation in which all the elements are changed may be performed.

  Also, although the initial operation was different between when the power was turned on with RWM clear and when it was turned on without RWM clear, when the power was turned on with RWM clear Alternatively, the common initial operation may be performed when the power is turned on without clearing the RWM. By doing so, the processing load on the main control unit 110m (main CPU 110a) and the effect control unit 130m (sub CPU 130a) can be reduced.

  Although the initial operation is not performed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, it may be performed. By doing this, even after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed and the game progress mode is entered, even if the variation effect is immediately started, the initial operation is ended during the setting change or the setting confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the variation effect from being disturbed by the initial operation.

(Display example of display of winning probability)
A display example of the display of the winning probability will be described with reference to FIG. 79.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), a winning probability display sticker 200 is attached in the vicinity of the first game information display device 59 (second special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65). The winning probability display sticker 200 is printed with the jackpot winning probability most advantageous to the player of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment and the jackpot winning probability most disadvantageous to the player (1 / 285-1). / 300). Further, the maximum value and the minimum value of the setting stages that can be set by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed (setting 4 to setting 1).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the first image display device 70 can also display the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, when the customer waiting effect is performed on the first image display device 70, the winning probability display image SG is displayed. In the winning probability display image SG, the jackpot winning probability (1/285, 1/290, 1/295, 1/300) for each set value of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment and the number of setting steps (setting 4) , Setting 3, Setting 2 and Setting 1) are displayed, and further, an expectation level display (★★★★) is displayed that indicates the expected value of the average number of game balls acquired in a series of increasing sections (a series of consecutive holidays). ing.

  This expectation level display is, for example, when the expected value of the average number of game balls to be acquired is 2000 in a series of increasing sections of the gaming machine 1 (a period in which so-called jackpots are continuously operated), one star is displayed and 4000 is displayed. In the case of up to pcs, 2 stars are displayed, in the case of up to 6000 pieces, 3 stars are displayed, and in the case of 6000 pieces or more, 4 stars are displayed.

  In this way, by displaying the winning probability and the setting stage of the gaming machine 1 at a position where the player can easily confirm the winning probability (winning probability display sticker 200, winning probability display image SG), the player can easily grasp the gaming performance. It is possible.

  Also, by displaying an expectation level display that indicates the expected value of the average number of game balls acquired, the player can intuitively recognize the expected value of the average number of game balls acquired, which can be used as a reference when selecting a gaming machine. You can

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability display image SG is displayed on the first image display device 70 during the customer waiting effect, but it may be displayed during the demonstration effect or during the customer waiting effect. When the touch sensor 15a of the firing handle 15 detects the player's hand, it may be displayed for a predetermined time, or may be displayed by operating the operation means such as the effect button 17, or at the start of the variable effect. It may be displayed.

  Although the winning probability display sticker 200 does not display the jackpot winning probability for each set value, it may display it. Further, although all the setting step numbers are not displayed, they may be displayed. Further, although the expectation level display is not displayed, it may be displayed.

  In the winning probability display image SG, the jackpot winning probability for each set value is displayed, but the jackpot winning probability most advantageous to the player and the jackpot winning probability most disadvantageous to the player are displayed. You can Further, although all the setting step numbers are displayed, the maximum value and the minimum value of the settable setting steps may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the production which suggests the currently set setting value to the player (hereinafter, referred to as “setting suggestion production”) is not executed, but the main control board 110 transfers the production control board 130. The setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the transmitted setting value designation command. For example, it may be suggested by changing the selection probability of the dialogue selected in the dialogue announcement depending on the set value, or the dialogue selection probability may be constant regardless of the set value, and the execution probability of the dialogue announcement may differ depending on the set value. It may be suggested by making it possible, or it may be made by making the expectation degree of the jackpot of the serif announcement differ depending on the set value. By doing so, it is possible to add a new game property of guessing the setting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that it is possible to provide an effect in which the execution probability and the expectation degree of the jackpot are constant regardless of the set value.

Further, the setting suggestive effect is not limited to the serif advance notice, and various things can be considered. For example, it may be suggested by the type of stop design of the effect design at the time of losing. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the variation effect of the loss and improve the enjoyment of the game.
Further, it may be suggested by the type of background image, by the type of image displayed during the jackpot production, or by the type of character image displayed during the reach production.

  Further, an RTC (real time clock) is provided as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month and day, day of the week, etc.), and the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is made different depending on the set value and the date and time. May be. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestive effect may be increased at a specific time or on a specific day to make it easier to guess the set value at a specific time or on a specific day, or at a specific time or on a specific day. It is also possible to increase the execution probability of the setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is 3 or more so that the setting value can be easily guessed at a specific time or specific day.

  The specific time and the specific day are, for example, the time when the setting may be overlooked by the player, such as 1 hour before the closing time, the time from the opening (power-on) to 1 hour, the specific day of the week, For example, the birthday of the character that is the motif of the game machine, or one week after the game machine is installed. The specific time and the specific day may be arbitrarily set by the game shop staff.

  Further, information indicating the date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) may be referred to and an error may be determined if the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is extremely high at a specific time. For example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the probability of executing the setting suggestion effect is high during a certain period (for example, the first fluctuating effect) after the power is turned on, the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect is set within one hour (a specific time) after opening the store. If the execution frequency is extremely high, it is possible that the power supply is turned on and off repeatedly to attempt to detect the set value, so an error may be determined.

  Further, when the setting suggestion effect is provided, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect performed once is not executed for a predetermined period. For example, if an effect that suggests that "the setting value is not 1" is executed multiple times in succession, the setting value may be inferred even if the effect that suggests that "the setting value is not 1" is confirmed multiple times. Because it is not useful for, the player feels annoying. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoying by preventing the setting suggestion effect once performed from being executed for a predetermined period.

  In addition, in the variable effect that is performed in a predetermined period after the setting is changed, an effect that indicates whether or not the setting has been changed (possibly performed) with a predetermined probability may be executed. .

  Further, in the first variation effect after the power is turned on, a highly accurate setting suggestion effect may be performed. In this case, it is preferable not to execute the highly accurate setting suggestion effect when the number of times of power-on per day exceeds the predetermined number. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on and off repeatedly in order to estimate the set value. In addition to the first variation effect, highly accurate setting suggestion effect may be performed from the power-on to a predetermined number of times of the variation effect.

  Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed when the variation effect reaches a specific number of executions. Further, if the variable display when the variable effect reaches a specific number of executions is the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting suggestion effect is performed, while if it is the variable display of the second special symbol, it is not performed. good.

  Further, when the variation effect has a prescribed number of executions (for example, every 100 rotations), it may be executed using a table of the setting suggestion effect dedicated to the prescribed number of executions. Specifically, when the specified number of executions (for example, every 100 rotations) is performed, it is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect than when the specified number of executions is not performed, or when the setting suggestion effect with high accuracy is performed. good.

  In addition, when an effect of a specific color (for example, a gold serif) is executed, it may be suggested that the set value is high. In this case, the selection rate of the effect of the specific color may be set to be higher each time the set value is increased, or the selection rate may be set to a certain probability and set to 1 or 2 or the like. When a particular color effect is selected during setting, execution may be restricted with a certain probability.

  Further, when the setting suggestion effect is performed during the jackpot effect, the execution probability and the selection probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed according to the type of the jackpot.

  Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the operation effect (so-called back button) for setting the operation effective period of the effect button 17 without displaying the operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the effect button 17.

  In addition, when performing the setting suggestion effect, a special sound effect (for example, a sound that is not output in other effects) may be output from the audio output device 9. By doing so, the effect (setting suggestion effect) being executed can be noticed, and the fact that it is the setting suggestion effect can be notified.

  Further, the setting suggestion effect may be set not to be executed by the operation of the player or the game shop staff. When the setting suggestion effect is set not to be executed, the setting suggestion effect itself may not be executed at all, and in the case of an effect which suggests the set value by the selection probability or the execution probability, any setting However, it suffices to have common selection probabilities and execution probabilities.

  Moreover, you may make it suggest a setting value by the stay period of the production mode. For example, if the stay period of the special effect mode when the high-probability game state or the jackpot production is changed to the low-probability game state is 21 times or more of the variable display, "the setting value is 2 or more" is suggested, and the variable display is 26 times or more. In that case, “setting value 4” may be suggested.

  Further, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the outlet 39 during the jackpot effect. For example, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased as the number of game balls entering the outlet 39 during the jackpot effect is increased, or the number of game balls entered into the outlet 39 during the jackpot effect may be increased. The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be increased as the number increases.

  Further, in the jackpot production, the number of prize balls during the jackpot production may be displayed, and the current set value may be suggested by the display mode of the prize ball number display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of the special symbol when the jackpot is won, whether or not to set the high probability game state after the jackpot is determined, but in the jackpot game a specific area (so-called V area ) May be set to the high-probability game state after the jackpot is over. Then, the present set value may be suggested by the presentation mode of the specific area winning effect when the game ball is won in the specific area.

  Further, as in the modified example of FIG. 53, backup power is supplied to the effect control unit 130m, the history of setting changes is stored in the effect control unit 130m, and the setting change history can be confirmed by a specific operation by the game shop staff. You may do it.

  Further, the player may be allowed to select the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed. For example, it is possible to select the type of setting suggestion effect executed during the high-probability game state during the jackpot game before the transition to the high-probability game state, or to operate the effect button 17 in the customer waiting effect. Then, you may make it selectable.

  In this embodiment, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the initial screen, the setting change screen, and the setting confirmation screen continue to be displayed, and the next predetermined When receiving the command (in the present embodiment, the customer waiting command, the fluctuation start command), the display of the initial screen, the setting change screen and the setting confirmation screen is ended, but the following predetermined command (book In the embodiment, even if the customer waiting command and the fluctuation start command are received, the display of the initial screen, the setting change screen, and the setting confirmation screen may not be terminated. By doing so, it becomes possible for the gaming shop clerk to know that the effect control board 130 has not normally received the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command.

  When the power-on designation command when the setting is changed or the power restoration designation command when the setting is confirmed cannot be received normally, the following predetermined command (in the present embodiment, , Waiting command, fluctuation start command), the display of the setting change screen and the setting confirmation screen is not terminated, and the power-on designation command when the RWM clear without setting change is performed When the reception is not normally performed, the display of the initial screen may be terminated by receiving the next predetermined command (in the present embodiment, a customer waiting command, a fluctuation start command).

  Further, when the power-on designation command when the setting is changed cannot be normally received, it is assumed that the next predetermined command (in the present embodiment, a customer waiting command, a fluctuation start command) is received. Also, do not end the display of the setting change screen, and receive the power restoration specification command when the setting is confirmed and the power-on designation command when the RWM clear without setting change is performed. When it is not possible, the display of the setting confirmation screen and the initial screen may be ended by receiving the next predetermined command (in the present embodiment, a customer waiting command, a fluctuation start command).

  In the present embodiment, a game is played using a game medium such as a game ball, and if a given condition is satisfied by the game, a predetermined amount of game medium is awarded to the player as a prize. A game may be played using the value data (game value) corresponding to, and a predetermined amount of value data (game value) may be awarded to the player as a prize when the award condition is satisfied by the game.

(Contents of the Invention Described in this Embodiment)
Here, in the conventional game machine, a game machine that can give a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal, value data, etc.) according to the result of the game is general. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays information indicating a set value (theoretical value) of the gaming machine performance on a display device (see, for example, JP-A-2016-1169898). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem in that the gaming machine performance is predetermined and the game advantage cannot be changed.

  As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the game. Specific information calculating means for collecting the game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in step 1 to calculate specific information (normal base value), and an information display section (information display device) for the specific information. 113), specific information display means to be displayed, and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means upon start of the setting change state, the effect control means , The above The setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the control information 1. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in (various winning openings, various starting openings), the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculating unit is configured to display the setting change image while displaying the setting change image. When the game medium is won in the winning area, the specific information is not calculated by the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and the game. Specific information calculating means for collecting the game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) generated in step 1 to calculate specific information (normal base value), and an information display section (information display device) for the specific information. 113), specific information display means to be displayed, and transmission means for transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means upon start of the setting change state, the effect control means , The above The setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the control information 1. When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in (various winning openings, various starting openings), the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the specific information calculation means is configured to display the setting change image while displaying the setting change image. When the game medium is won in the winning area, the game information is not collected by the winning. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means, setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) First game control information (setting change designation command) in the winning determination means for executing a winning determination as to whether or not a game medium (gaming ball, medal) has won, and the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Send And a transmission unit, wherein the effect control unit displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, The game control means limits the execution of the prize determination while being controlled to the setting change state, and controls the execution of the prize determination after the setting change state is completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the first control information, and the second control information. Upon receipt of When the display of the setting change image is ended and the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is completed. It is supposed to continue. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing the above, and the giving control means for performing the giving control of the gaming privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on the giving information (command) transmitted from the game controlling means, The game control means controls the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and first controls the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Transmitting information (setting change designation command), transmitting means for transmitting second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and game information generated in the game (total Specific information calculating means for collecting specific information (normal base value) by collecting the number of payouts, the number of normal mid-outs, and the number of normal mid-term payouts; An information display unit, and the effect control unit displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information, The display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state ends. Even if the setting change image is continuously displayed, the award control unit is in the prize changing area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting changing image is being displayed when the setting changing state is controlled. ) To the game medium (game ball, Dal), if the game media is won in the winning area after the setting change state is displayed and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control by the winning is not performed. If the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting information is being controlled and the specific information calculating means is performing the awarding control by winning, and the setting information is controlled to the setting changing state, If the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, the specific information is not calculated by winning, and the specific information is calculated by winning. Is supposed to do. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and the effect with the start of the setting change state Transmitting means for transmitting the first control information (setting change designation command) to the control means, and transmitting the second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and a game. Specific information calculating means for collecting the generated game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) and calculating specific information (normal base value), and an information display unit (information display 113) for the specific information. ) Is displayed on the predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. ) Is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and when the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the setting is changed. The setting change image continues to be displayed even if the change state has been completed, and the addition control means is in the prize area (various prizes) while the setting change image is being displayed when the setting change state is controlled. Mouth, various starting mouths When a game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won, the awarding control by the winning is not performed, and the game medium is displayed in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed. If a prize is won, the awarding control by the prize is performed, and the specific information calculating means is in the prize area when the setting change image is displayed when the setting medium is being controlled. If a prize is won, the game information is not collected by the prize, and if the game medium wins in the prize area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, The game information is collected by winning the prize. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means, setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) The winning determination means for determining whether or not the game medium has won, and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. Change letter And a transmission unit that transmits second control information (power-on designation command) to the effect control unit upon completion of the effect control unit, the effect control unit having a predetermined display unit upon reception of the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed. When the second control information is not normally received, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is finished, and the game control means is controlled to the setting change state. At this time, the execution of the prize determination is restricted, and the execution of the prize determination is controlled to be possible after the setting change state is completed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is a sound output section for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). (sound The output device 9) includes volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output to a predetermined volume, and a setting change image is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. (Setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended in response to the reception of the second control information, and the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. After the display of the setting change image is finished, the volume can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) performed by the player, and the light emitting section () for effecting the game. For frames The lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) are provided with light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the production light to a predetermined light amount, and a predetermined display is provided upon receipt of the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information, and the setting change image is being displayed. Indicates that the light amount cannot be set, and the light amount can be set after the display of the setting change image. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is a sound output section for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). ( Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume, and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19), the game effect is produced. And a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting section (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, backlight of the image display device) to perform a predetermined light amount. 1 A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the control information, and the setting change image is displayed in response to the reception of the second control information. And the volume and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is displayed, and the volume and the light amount can be set after the setting change image is displayed. . By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is a sound output section for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). ( The voice output device 9) includes volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be set to a predetermined volume, and the setting is changed to a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. An image (setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed. In this case, the setting change image continues to be displayed even if the setting change state has ended, and the volume cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twelfth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on a light amount adjustment operation (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) performed by the player, and the light emitting section () for effecting the game. frame The lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the backlight of the image display device) are provided with a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the production light to a predetermined light amount, and a predetermined display is provided in response to the reception of the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the unit (first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information, and the setting change image is being displayed. In the case where the second control information is not normally received in, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is completed, and the setting of the light amount is not performed during the display of the setting change image. It is possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4); The first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the second control information (power-on designation command is sent to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is a sound output section for effecting a game based on a volume adjustment operation by the player (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). ( Based on the volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to be output from the voice output device 9) to a predetermined volume, and the light amount adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19), the game effect is produced. And a light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting section (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, backlight of the image display device) to perform a predetermined light amount. 1 A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the control information, and the setting change image is displayed in response to the reception of the second control information. If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is finished, and the setting change is performed. While displaying an image Settings of the serial volume and the amount of light is in a state impossible. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start condition (winning of a game medium into a start opening) ) Is established, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The above The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the constant change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. ) Transmitting means, specific information calculating means for collecting specific game information generated in the game (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) and calculating specific information (normal base value), Specific information display means for displaying information on the information display section (information display device 113), and the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, a predetermined display section (first image display device 70). ) To display the setting change image (setting change screen), the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the predetermined display unit is received with the reception of the third control information. Variable display of production design (Variation effect) is started, and when the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is finished, When the setting control unit is controlled to the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, the game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). In the case, the awarding control by the prize is not performed, and when the game medium is won in the award area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control by the prize is performed. If the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed and the game is being controlled in the setting change state, the specific information calculating means performs the special prize by the winning. If the game medium wins in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed after the end of the setting change state without calculating the fixed information, the specific information is calculated by the winning, If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information but normally receives the third control information while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is configured to end and start the variable display of the effect design. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. , And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start condition (winning of a game medium into a start opening). Based on the establishment, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols) and first control information (setting change designation command) are transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the setting is performed. The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the changed state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command) is sent to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. Send And a specific information calculation means for collecting specific game information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) to generate specific information (normal base value), and the specific information A specific information display unit to be displayed on a display unit (information display unit 113), and the effect control unit is set on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the first control information. A change image (setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the effect design is displayed on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. If the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is displayed even if the setting change state is completed. Continuing the above, When the stage is controlled to the setting change state and the game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting changing image is displayed, Without performing the awarding control by the prize, if the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control by the prize is performed, The specific information calculation means calculates the specific information by the winning when the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting changed image is being displayed and the setting changed image is being controlled. If the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, the specific information is calculated by the winning and the game control is performed. Means, after the end of the setting change state, when the start condition is satisfied during the display of the setting change image, start the variable display of the symbol, the effect control means, the second control information If the variable display of the symbol is started while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start condition (winning of a game medium into a start opening) ) Is established, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The above The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the constant change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. ) Transmitting means, specific information calculating means for collecting specific game information generated in the game (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) and calculating specific information (normal base value), Specific information display means for displaying information on the information display section (information display device 113), and the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, a predetermined display section (first image display device 70). ) To display the setting change image (setting change screen), the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the predetermined display unit is received with the reception of the third control information. Variable display of production design (Variation effect) is started, and when the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, the display of the setting change image is continued even if the setting change state is finished, When the setting control unit is controlled to the setting change state and the setting change image is displayed, the game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). In the case, the awarding control by the prize is not performed, and when the game medium is won in the award area after the setting change state is finished and the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control by the prize is performed. When the game medium is won in the winning area when the setting change image is being displayed and the setting change image is being displayed, the specific information calculating means performs the game by the winning. Without collecting the game information, after the setting change state is finished and when the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed, the game information is collected by the winning, If the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information but normally receives the third control information while the setting change image is being displayed, the effect control means displays the setting change image. It is configured to end and start the variable display of the effect design. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means, Based on the establishment of the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the starting condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the symbol (special symbol) Variable display means for performing variable display, and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed at the end of the setting change state. hand Second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted, and transmission means for transmitting the third control information (fluctuation start command) to the effect control means with the start of variable display of the symbols, and a game that occurs in the game. Specific information calculating means for collecting information (total out number, normal medium out number, normal medium payout number) to calculate specific information (normal base value), and the specific information in an information display unit (information display 113). Specific information display means for displaying, and the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70). It is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information. Let's change the settings When the second control information is not normally received during the display, the setting change image is continued to be displayed even if the setting change state is completed, and the giving control means controls the setting change state. If the game medium (gaming ball, medal) is won in the winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings) while the setting change image is displayed, the awarding control by the winning is not performed. When the game medium is won in the winning area after the setting changed state is displayed and the setting changed image is displayed, the awarding control by the winning is performed, and the specific information calculation means sets the setting. When the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is being displayed while being controlled to the changed state, the game information is not collected by the winning, and the setting change state is changed. After the end and when the game medium is won in the winning area while the setting change image is displayed, the game information is collected by the winning, and the game control means, after the end of the setting change state. When the start condition is satisfied while the setting change image is being displayed, the variable display of the symbol is started, the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change is made. When the variable display of the symbol is started while displaying the image, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) for performing a grant control of a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. ), And the game control means is a setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a start condition (winning of a game medium into a start opening) ) Is established, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The above The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the constant change state, and the third control information (fluctuation start command is sent to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols. ) Is transmitted, and a winning determination means for determining whether or not a game medium (gaming ball, medal) has won in a winning area (various winning openings, various starting openings). The control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of the first control information, and upon reception of the second control information. The display of the setting change image is ended, and the variable display (variation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit in response to the reception of the third control information, and the second is displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. Control information is not received normally In the case of, if the setting change state has ended, the display of the setting change image is continued, and the game control means limits the execution of the winning determination when being controlled to the setting change state, After the setting change state is finished, the winning determination is executed so that the effect control means does not normally receive the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed when the setting change image is displayed. When the 3 control information is normally received, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect symbols is started. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. And a payout control board (payout control board 120) that controls the granting of a game privilege (prize ball, prize medal) based on the grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means, Based on the establishment of the setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and the starting condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the symbol (special symbol) Variable display means for performing variable display, and first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the setting change state, and the effect control is performed at the end of the setting change state. hand Second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the transmission means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command) to the effect control means with the start of the variable display of the symbols, and the winning area (various types). A winning determination means for performing a determination of whether or not a game medium (gaming ball, medal) has won in a winning opening, various starting openings), and the effect control means receives the first control information. Along with this, a predetermined display section (first image display device 70) displays a setting change image (setting change screen), and the display of the setting change image is ended upon receipt of the second control information. 3 In response to the reception of the control information, the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and when the second control information is not normally received during the display of the setting change image, The setting change state has ended Also continues to display the setting change image, the game control means limits the execution of the prize determination while being controlled to the setting change state, the execution of the prize determination after the end of the setting change state When the start condition is satisfied while the setting change image is being displayed after the setting change state is ended, the variable display of the symbol is started, and the effect control means is configured to When the control information is not normally received and the variable display of the symbols is started, the display of the setting change image is maintained. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. Control means And transmitting means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command) to the game, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the player has performed a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). The sound output unit (audio output device 9) for producing the effect is provided with a volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound to a predetermined volume, and a predetermined display unit (with the reception of the first control information). The setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on the first image display device 70), the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the setting change image is displayed with the reception of the third control information. Then, the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit, and when the second control information is not normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the setting change state ends. Even if the setting is changed While the image is being displayed and the setting change image is being displayed, the volume cannot be set, the second control information is not normally received, and the setting change image is being displayed. When the third control information is normally received, the display of the setting change image is terminated and the variable display of the effect design is started, and the volume can be set after the variable display of the effect design is started. It will be in a state. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. Control means And a transmission means for transmitting third control information (fluctuation start command), wherein the effect control means is based on a player's light amount adjustment operation (up / down button operation of the cross key 19). The light emitting unit (lighting device for frame 10, illuminating device for board 74, backlight of image display device) for performing an effect is provided with light amount setting means for setting the light amount of the effect light to a predetermined light amount, A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon receipt of the control information, and the setting change image is displayed upon receipt of the second control information. End, start the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information, and normally receive the second control information while the setting change image is displayed. If not, Note that the setting change image continues to be displayed even if the setting change state has ended, and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed, and the second control information should not be normally received. Without, when the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended and the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and the effect symbol concerned. After the start of the variable display of, the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and start. Based on the establishment of the condition (winning of the game medium into the starting opening), the variable display means for performing variable display of the symbol (special symbol), and the first control information to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command) is transmitted, the second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the end of the setting change state, and the effect is effected with the start of variable display of the symbols. Control means And a means for transmitting the third control information (variation start command), wherein the effect control means is based on the fact that the player has performed a volume adjustment operation (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross key 19). A volume setting means for setting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output section (audio output device 9) for performing the effect to a predetermined volume, and a light quantity adjustment operation by the player (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross key 19) Based on the existence, the light amount of the effect light for causing the light emitting unit (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, the backlight of the image display device) for performing the game effect to emit light is set to a predetermined light amount. A setting unit, which causes a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) to display a setting change image (setting change screen) upon reception of the first control information, and receives the second control information. With the above The display of the changed image is ended, and the variable display (fluctuation effect) of the effect symbol is started on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information, and the second control information is displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. If the message is not normally received, the setting change image continues to be displayed even if the setting change state has ended, and the volume and the light amount cannot be set while the setting change image is being displayed. When the second control information is not normally received and the third control information is normally received while the setting change image is being displayed, the display of the setting change image is terminated. The variable display of the effect symbol is started, and after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the volume and the light amount can be set. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problems, a game privilege (prize) based on a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and additional information (command) transmitted from the game control means. An award control means (payout control board 120) for performing an award control of balls and award medals, and the game control means includes a first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing memory information associated with the progress control. , Setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined value stored in the first information storage means when the setting change state is ended. First initialization means for initializing storage information (information other than the setting value area of the game RWM area), and initialization by the addition control means in association with initialization of predetermined storage information of the first information storage means Information (electric Initialization information transmission means for transmitting a throw-in command), and the addition control means receives second initialization information storage means (payout RAM 121c) for storing storage information associated with the addition control, and the initialization information. Then, there is provided second initialization means for initializing predetermined storage information (information other than the firing permission flag area of the RWM area) stored in the second information storage means. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a grant control for performing a game privilege (prize ball, award medal) grant control based on grant information (command) transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control board 120), the game control means, any one of a plurality of set values (1-4), the first information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the storage information associated with the progress control. Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to Crab, and predetermined storage information stored in the first information storage means when controlling the setting change state (other than the set value area of the game RWM area) Initialization information), and initialization for transmitting initialization information (power-on designation command) to the addition control means in association with initialization of predetermined storage information of the first information storage means. information And a second information storage unit (payout RAM 121c) for storing the storage information associated with the addition control, and the initialization information stored in the second information storage unit. Second initialization means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the launch permission flag area of the RWM area). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means stores information stored in association with the progress control. Means (main RAM 110c), setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and information stored in the information storage means when the setting change state is finished. Initializing means for initializing predetermined stored information (information other than the setting value area of the game RWM area), wherein the information storing means initializes the stored information by the initializing means. There is one storage area (area other than the setting value area of the game RWM area) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. There. Further, the game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means includes an information storage means (main RAM 110c) for storing the storage information associated with the progress control and a plurality of set values ( Setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to any one of 1 to 4), and predetermined storage information (game RWM area of the game RWM area when stored in the information storage means when controlling the setting change state). Initialization information for initializing information other than the set value area), the information storage means is a first storage area (set value area of the game RWM area) in which the storage information is initialized by the initialization means. Area) and a second storage area (information area of the information RWM area) in which the storage information is not initialized by the initialization means. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to, and the game information (the number of normal middle outs, the number of normal middle payouts) generated in the game in the predetermined game section are collected to calculate the specific information (normal base value) An information calculation unit and an information display unit for displaying the specific information on an information display unit (information display unit 113) are provided, and the information calculation unit changes the set value in the predetermined game section. Is configured to calculate the specific information based on the game information of the game performed before the change and the game information of the game performed after the change. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game is provided, and the game control means is any one of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The setting change means for controlling the setting change state that can be set to, and the game information (the number of normal middle outs, the number of normal middle payouts) generated in the game in the predetermined game section are collected to calculate the specific information (normal base value). An information calculation unit and an information display unit for displaying the specific information on the information display unit are provided. The number) is collected as the game information. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality detection means for detecting the occurrence of anomalies (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and first to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. And a transmission unit that transmits control information (setting change designation command) and second control information (error designation command) in response to detection of the predetermined abnormality. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) upon reception of information, and an abnormality notification is displayed on the predetermined display unit upon reception of the second control information. An image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.) is displayed, and the abnormality notification image is not displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. . By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality determination means for determining the occurrence of abnormalities (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and the first control information to the effect control means upon the start of the setting change state. (Setting change designation command), and transmitting means for transmitting second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, wherein the effect control means includes the first control information. A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the message, and an abnormality notification image (on the predetermined display unit is displayed on reception of the second control information). An illegal winning error image, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and the game control means does not judge the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state. Has become. Further, a game control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control means (production control board 130) that performs the production control of the game based on the control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. , The game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a predetermined abnormality (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic Error determination means for determining the occurrence of an error, a radio wave error, a door opening error, etc.), and the first control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, and the predetermined And a transmission unit that transmits second control information (error designation command) in response to the occurrence of the abnormality, the production control unit is configured to receive a predetermined display unit (first image) when the first control information is received. Display A setting change image (setting change screen) is displayed on 70), and an abnormality notification image (illegal winning error image, abnormal winning error image, magnetic error image, etc.) is displayed on the predetermined display unit upon receipt of the second control information. Radio wave error image, door opening error image, etc.), the game control means is configured to be able to determine the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality in the setting change state, and the effect control means displays the setting change image If the second control information is received during the operation, the setting change image is preferentially displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a predetermined Abnormality detection means for detecting the occurrence of anomalies (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.), and first to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state. Control information (setting change designation command) is transmitted, second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and detection of the predetermined abnormality is performed. 3 transmission information for transmitting control information (error designation command), the effect control means, upon receipt of the first control information, the setting change image on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70). (Setting change screen) is displayed, the display of the setting change image is ended with the reception of the second control information, and the abnormality notification image ( An illegal winning error image, an abnormal winning error image, a magnetic error image, a radio wave error image, a door opening error image, etc.) are displayed, and the abnormality notification image cannot be displayed while the setting change image is being displayed. After the display of the changed image is completed, the abnormality notification image can be displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 27th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a power supply. Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power supply restoration) based on input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (power supply restoration specification command) to the effect control means upon completion of the initial processing. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. Display, display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information, and display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information , The plurality of effect symbols to be displayed with the reception of the second control information and the plurality of effect symbols to be displayed with the reception of the third control information are the same effect symbol (initial effect symbol "135"). ). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game effect control based on control information (command) transmitted from the game control means. The production control means (production control board 130) for performing, and the game control means, the setting change means for controlling to a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4), and a power supply. Initial processing means for executing initial processing (processing for power supply restoration) based on input, and transmitting first control information (setting change designation command) to the effect control means with the start of the setting change state, The second control information (power-on designation command) is transmitted to the effect control means upon completion of the setting change state, and the third control information (power supply restoration specification command) to the effect control means upon completion of the initial processing. ) Is transmitted, the effect control means displays a setting change image (setting change screen) on a predetermined display unit (first image display device 70) in response to the reception of the first control information. Display, display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the second control information, and display a plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit with the reception of the third control information While displaying the plurality of effect symbols on the predetermined display unit, one effect mode of a plurality of effect modes (effect modes A to G) is displayed, and the second control information is received. The effect mode displayed along with the effect mode and the effect mode displayed along with the reception of the third control information are the same effect mode (effect mode A). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a setting changing means for controlling to a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a starting condition (game medium to a starting opening) Based on the establishment of a prize), it is determined whether to execute a first special game (small hit game) advantageous to the player or a second special game (big hit game) advantageous to the first special game. Means, based on the determination result of the determination means, variable display means for performing variable display of symbols (special symbols), and when it is determined to execute the first special game, the type of the first special game is determined. And a second deciding means for deciding the type of the second special game when it is decided to execute the second special game, wherein the deciding means is set by the setting changing means. With the probability according to the set value Whether or not to execute the special game is determined (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), and whether or not to execute the first special game with the same probability regardless of the set value set by the setting changing means. Is determined (so that the small hit winning probability is the same), the first determining means determines the type of the first special game at the same rate regardless of the set value set by the setting changing means. It is supposed to do. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a thirtieth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a setting changing means for controlling to a setting changing state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4) and a starting condition (game medium to a starting opening) Based on the establishment of the winning), a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a variable display of the symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means. The variation display means to be executed, and the determination means for determining the type of the special game when it is determined to execute the special game, the determination means according to the set value set by the setting change means With the probability that the special game is executed (so that the jackpot winning probability is different), the type of the special game and the rate of determining each special game are set by the setting changing means. Regardless of value It is one. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 31st configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance effect control for a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with control means (production control board 130), the game control means is set to control a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). The changing means, the first information displaying means for displaying the current set value on the first information display device (information display 113), and the status display indicating the setting change state are displayed on the second information display device (status confirmation). A second information display means for displaying on a display 68), the first information display device is provided on the back surface of the gaming machine, and the second information display device is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 32nd structure for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine including a control unit (production control board 130), the game control unit is a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), or the present. Setting change means for controlling the set value of the set value to a checkable state (setting check mode), first information display means for displaying the current set value on the first information display device (information display 113), A second information display means for displaying on the second information display device (state confirmation display device 68) a state display indicating that the state is either the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Information display device The second information display device is provided on the back surface of the gaming machine, and the second information display device is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. , The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) are used to notify that the setting is being changed (setting change notification), and in the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is used by using the rendering means. Is notified (setting confirmation notification). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-third configuration for solving the above problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine including control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means controls to a game stopped state in which the progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined abnormality (unrecoverable error) occurs in the gaming machine. A game stopping means, a setting changing means for controlling a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), and a current setting value for the first information display device (information) A first information display means for displaying on the display device 113), and a second information display means for displaying a status display indicating the setting change status on the second information display device (status confirmation display device 68). , The first information display device is provided on the back surface of the game machine, the second information display device is provided on the front surface of the game machine, and the game control means controls the second information display device when the game is stopped. The abnormality display (“E”) is displayed on the first information display device without displaying the abnormality display indicating the predetermined abnormality. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). ), And an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirming signal (security check) outside the gaming machine. Signal), an unrecoverable error signal (security signal), and the like, and external output means for performing the initialization process and controlling the setting change state. The external output signal based on the initialization process and the external output signal based on the setting change state are output from the same output terminal. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance effect control for a game based on control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with control means (production control board 130), the game control means is set to control a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). Changing means and external output means for outputting an external output signal to the outside of the gaming machine (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirmation signal (security signal), non-recoverable error Signal (security signal), etc., and the external output means outputs the external output signal in the setting change state, and ends the setting change state. It stops output of the external output signal after a predetermined period of time. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4) ), And an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirming signal (security check) outside the gaming machine. Signal), an unrecoverable error signal (security signal), and the like, and an external output means for outputting the initialization processing based on being controlled to the setting change state. When the initialization process is executed, the effect control means uses the effect means (the image display devices 70 and 71, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74) to perform initialization notification. (Power-on notification) and the external output means is based on the initialization process after the initialization notification is started when the initialization process is performed based on the control in the setting change state. The external output signal is output. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-seventh configuration for solving the above problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). ), Or a setting changing means for controlling the current setting value to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), R outside the game machine). External output means for outputting an M clear signal (security signal), a setting confirmation signal (security signal), an unrecoverable error signal (security signal), etc., wherein the external output means performs the initialization processing. An external output signal is output depending on the case of performing, the case of controlling to the setting change state, and the case of controlling to the setting confirmation state, and an external output signal based on the initialization process and an external based on the setting change state. The output signal and the external output signal based on the setting confirmation state are output from the same output terminal. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-eighth configuration for solving the above problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine including a control unit (production control board 130), the game control unit is a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4), or the present. Setting changing means for controlling the set value of the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal)) outside the gaming machine, An external output means for outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal), a non-recoverable error signal (security signal), etc., wherein the external output means is the setting change state. The external output signal is output, the output of the external output signal is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the setting change state ends, and the external output signal is output in the setting confirmation state. Is output, and the output of the external output signal is stopped after the lapse of the predetermined period from the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  A thirty-ninth configuration for solving the above problems is a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). ), Or a setting changing means for controlling the current setting value to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), and an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), R outside the game machine). An external output means for outputting an M clear signal (security signal), a setting confirmation signal (security signal), a non-recoverable error signal (security signal), etc., wherein the initialization means is set to the setting change state. Based on the control, the initialization process is executed, and when the initialization process is executed, the production control unit (image display devices 70 and 71, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device). 10, the panel lighting device 74) is used to perform initialization notification (power-on notification), and the external output means outputs the external output signal when controlling to the setting confirmation state, and to the setting change state. When the initialization processing based on being controlled is performed, the external output signal based on the initialization processing is output after the initialization notification is started. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 40th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). ) Control setting means, a game stop means for controlling a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined abnormality (unrecoverable error) occurs in the game machine, and an outside of the game machine. An external output means for outputting an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirmation signal (security signal), unrecoverable error signal (security signal), etc.) Provided, the external output means outputs an external output signal in the case of performing the initialization process, in the case of controlling the setting change state, and in the case of controlling the game stop state, to the initialization process. The external output signal based, the external output signal based on the setting change state, and the external output signal based on the game stopped state are output from the same output terminal. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a forty-first configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with control means (production control board 130), the game control means is set to control a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). When a predetermined abnormality (unrecoverable error) occurs in the changing device and the game machine, a game stopping means for controlling the game to a stopped state in which the progress of the game is stopped, and an external output signal is output to the outside of the game machine. External output means (setting change signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirmation signal (security signal), non-recoverable error signal (security signal) Etc.), the external output means outputs the external output signal in the setting change state, and the external output signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the setting change state ends. In the game stopped state, the output of the external output signal is continued until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a forty-second configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the gaming control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the storage. An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the unit, and a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (1 to 4). ) Control setting means, a game stop means for controlling a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined abnormality (unrecoverable error) occurs in the game machine, and an outside of the game machine. An external output means for outputting an external output signal (setting changing signal (security signal), RWM clear signal (security signal), setting confirmation signal (security signal), unrecoverable error signal (security signal), etc.) The initialization means executes the initialization processing on the basis of being controlled to the setting change state, and the effect control means, when the initialization processing is executed, the effect means (image display device). 70, 71, the voice output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74) is used to perform initialization notification (power-on notification), and the external output means when controlling to the game stopped state. When the initialization process is performed based on the output of the external output signal and control of the setting change state, the initialization process is performed after the initialization notification is started. And outputs the brute the external output signal. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 43rd configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130), the game control means is a storage means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding stored contents even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and a first An initialization unit capable of executing an initialization process (RWM clear process) for initializing a predetermined storage content of the storage unit when the operation unit (the operation member 108 (RWM clear switch 111a)) is operated; When the operating means and the second operating means (setting key (setting key switch 112a)) are operated, a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). ) Control means and external output means for outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine, and the initialization means performs the initialization even if it is controlled to the setting change state. Executing the processing, the external output means can output an external output signal (RWM clear signal (security signal)) indicating execution of the initialization processing, and the initial output based on being controlled to the setting change state. The timing from the start of the initialization process to the output of the external output signal is earlier when the initialization process is performed based on the control in the setting change state than when the initialization process is performed. . By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a forty-fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with control means (production control board 130), the game control means is set to control a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). The changing means, the first information displaying means for displaying the current set value on the first information display device (information display 113), and the status display indicating the setting change state are displayed on the second information display device (status confirmation). Second information display means for displaying on a display device 68), the first information display device is provided on the back surface of the gaming machine, the second information display device is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, Power supply to Once started, no operation check display is be carried out of the second information display apparatus performs operation confirmation display of the first information display device (all blinking). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a forty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means (production control board 130) and an information display device configured of a plurality of display units and capable of displaying predetermined information, the game control means has a plurality of set values (1 to 4). The information display includes: a setting changing unit that controls a setting change state (setting changing mode) that can be set to any one; and an information display unit that displays the set value on the information display device (information display 113). The device confirms the operation at a predetermined timing (before starting the display of the performance display) using all of the plurality of display units including the display unit that displays the set value and the display unit that does not display the set value. display Perform all blinking display). By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  As a 46th configuration for solving the above problems, a game control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance effect control for the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means. In a gaming machine provided with control means (production control board 130), the game control means is set to control a setting change state (setting change mode) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (1 to 4). The information display device is provided with a changing unit and an information display unit for displaying the set value on the information display device (information display 113), and the information display device is in the setting change state after starting the power supply to the gaming machine. When controlling, the operation confirmation display (all blinking display) is performed after displaying the setting value, and when the setting change state is not controlled after starting the power supply to the gaming machine, The operation check display is performed without displaying the serial settings. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the advantage of the game.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed according to the type of jackpot game (jackpot special symbol) and the gaming state at the time of jackpot, but all jackpot games After the end, the gaming machine may be shifted to the high-accuracy short time gaming state, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the gaming machine may be shifted to the low-probability non-time short gaming state or the low-probability time short gaming state. In this case, regardless of the set value, the number of times of the variable display executed in the high-accuracy short time gaming state may be the same, or the change for each set value such that the continuation rate of the high probability short time gaming state is the same. The number of times of display may be set.

  Also, after all the jackpot game is over, transition to the high-probability game state, and if you win the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state, the high-probability game state is terminated It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

  In addition, when a game ball passes through a specific area provided inside the special winning opening in a specific round game of a jackpot game, it shifts to a high-accuracy-time short game state after the jackpot game, and the game ball passes through the specific area. If not, it may be a gaming machine that shifts to the low-probability time short gaming state after the jackpot game is over.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), but the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Although it is supposed to be, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line by the game using the medal (game medium) as the gaming value (the grant condition is satisfied). Also, the present invention can be applied to a rotating-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) capable of giving a player a predetermined amount of prize medal. Furthermore, it can be used for a ball game machine and an arrangement ball game machine.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Gaming Machine 5 Gaming Board 44 Universal Drawing Gate 45 First Starting Port 47 Second Starting Port 50 First Big Winning Port 53 Second Big Winning Port 70 First Image Display 71 Second Image Display 9 Audio Output Device 10 Frame Lighting device 74 Panel lighting device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b Main ROM
110c Main RAM
120 payout control board 130 production control board 130a sub CPU
130b Sub ROM
130c Sub RAM
111a RWM clear switch 112a Setting key switch 113 Information display 68 Status confirmation display

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for effecting control of the game based on the control information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means,
Setting changing means for controlling a setting change state that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values;
When a predetermined abnormality occurs in the game machine, a game stop means for controlling a game stop state for stopping the progress of the game,
An external output means for outputting an external output signal to the outside of the gaming machine,
The external output means,
Outputting the external output signal in the setting change state, stopping the output of the external output signal after a lapse of a predetermined period from the setting change state,
In the game stopped state, the output of the external output signal is continued until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
A gaming machine characterized by that.